Samsung SPH D700_UG_DG27_PS_081710_F6 Sprint D700 Epic 4G User Guide Manual To The B7f5e428 4b5b 487e B5d1 Bd69948d9e4b

User Manual: Samsung SPH-D700_UG_DG27_PS_081710_F6 to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 264 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

©2010 Sprint. SPRINT and the logo are trademarks of Sprint.
Other marks are the property of their respective owners.
8/17/10
www.sprint.com
User Guide
SPH-D700.book Page a Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
SPH-D700_UG_DG27_PS_081710_F6
Consejo: Para encontrar esta guía para usuarios en español,
por favor visita a www.sprint.com y haz clic en
Support > Devices.
To find this user guide in Spanish, please visit
www.sprint.com and click Support > Devices.
Important Privacy Message – Sprint’s policies often do not
apply to third-party applications. Third-party applications may
access your personal information or require Sprint to disclose
your customer information to the third-party application
provider. To find out how a third-party application will collect,
access, use, or disclose your personal information, check the
application provider’s policies, which can usually be found on
their website. If you aren’t comfortable with the third-party
application’s policies, don’t use the application.
Open Source Software – Some software components of this
product incorporate source code covered under GNU General
Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License
(LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open
source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the
open source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsungmobile.com/index.jsp.
This device uses open source software. Press >
and tap Settings > About phone > Legal information on the
device for more details
SPH-D700.book Page b Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Table of Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Your Device’s Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Section 1: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1A. Setting Up Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Setting Up Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Activating Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Setting Up Your Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Sprint Account Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Section 2: Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2A. Device Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Viewing the Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Turning Your Device On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Battery and Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Device Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Navigation and Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Entering Text Using the Android Keyboard . . . . 41
Entering Text Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Entering Text Using the QWERTY Keyboard . . 51
Creating a Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2B. Making and Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . 56
Making Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Missed Call Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Calling Emergency Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
In-Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
End-of-Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Additional Calling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Saving a Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Finding a Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Dialing From the Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Plus (+) Code Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Tip: Looking for something? If you don’t see it in the headings
listed here, try the Index on page 237.
SPH-D700.book Page c Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2C. Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Language Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Location Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Synchronizing Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Search Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Airplane Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
TTY Use With Sprint Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2D. Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Viewing Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Call Log Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Making a Call From Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Saving a Number From Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Altering a Number From Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Erasing the Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2E. Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Creating a New Contacts Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Saving a Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Confirming Contact Synchronization . . . . . . . . . 94
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Contacts Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Contacts Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Editing a Contacts Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Adding a Number to a Contacts Entry . . . . . . 100
Editing a Contacts Entry’s Number . . . . . . . . . . 100
Sending Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Assigning a Picture to an Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Deleting Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Adding Entries to Your Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Adding Facebook Content to your Contacts . 102
2F. Calendar & Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Alarm Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Updating Your Device Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Updating Your Android Operating System . . . 117
Updating Your Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
SPH-D700.book Page d Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Updating Your PRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
2G. Voice Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Voice Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Opening Menus With Voice Dialer . . . . . . . . . . 121
Text-to-Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
2H. microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Your Device’s microSD Card and Adapter . . . 123
Connecting Your Device to Your Computer . . 125
microSD Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Important Connection Information . . . . . . . . . . 129
2I. Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Taking Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Recording Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
2J. Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Turning Bluetooth On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Using the Bluetooth Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . 143
Pairing Bluetooth Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Disconnecting Bluetooth Connection During
an Active Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Section 3: Sprint Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics . . . . . . . . . . 150
Visual Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Text Messaging (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Multimedia Messaging (MMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Making a 3-Way Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Roaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
3B. Web and Data Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Getting Started With Data Services . . . . . . . . . 168
Navigating the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
4G Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Using the Android Market . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music . . . . . . . 202
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Sprint TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
SPH-D700.book Page e Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Streaming Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
AllShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
3D. GPS Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
GPS Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Google Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Sprint Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Getting Driving Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Section 4: Safety and Warranty
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4A. Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . 222
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to
Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Caring for the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Radio Frequency (RF) Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Owner’s Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
User Guide Proprietary Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Manufacturer’s Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
SPH-D700.book Page f Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
i
Introduction
This User Guide introduces you to Sprint® service and
all the features of your new device. It’s divided into four
sections:
⽧Section 1: Getting Started
⽧Section 2: Your Device
⽧Section 3: Sprint Service Features
⽧Section 4: Safety and Warranty Information
Your Device’s Menu
The following table outlines your device’s main menu
structure. For more information about using your
device’s menus, see “Navigation and Customization”
on page 26.
From the Home screen, press to open the menu:
䡲Add ( )
䡲Wallpaper ( )
䡲Search ( )
䡲Notifications ( )
䡲Settings ( )
Tap these onscreen buttons to reveal these additional
options and features.
Device menus with additional options (“sub-options”)
appear with adjacent to the list entry.
Note: Because of updates in phone software, this printed
guide may not be the most current version for your
phone. Visit www.sprint.com and sign on to My Sprint
to access the most recent version of the user guide.
WARNING: Please refer to the Important Safety Information
section on page 222 to learn about information
that will help you safely use your phone. Failure to
read and follow the Important Safety Information
in this phone guide may result in serious bodily
injury, death, or property damage.
SPH-D700.book Page i Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
ii
> Add
1: Samsung Widgets
1: AccuWeather Clock 2: Buddies now
3: Calendar Clock 4: Feeds and Updates
5: Program Monitor 6: Y! Finance Clock
2: Android Widgets
1: Analog clock 2: Facebook
3: Music 4: NASCAR
5: Picture frame 6: Power control
7: Search 8: Sprint Football Live
9: Sprint TV 10: Voicemail
11: Yo uTube
3: Shortcuts
1: Applications 2: Bookmark
3: Contact 4: Direct dial
5: Direct message 6: Directions & Navigation
7: Gmail label 8: Latitude
9: Music playlist 10: Settings
4: Folders
1: New folder 2: All contacts
3: Contacts with phone numbers
4: Facebook Phonebook
5: Received list from Bluetooth
6: Recent documents 7: Starred contacts
5: Wallpapers
1: Gallery 2: Live wallpapers
3: Wallpaper gallery
> Wallpaper
1: Gallery
2: Live wallpapers
2: Wallpaper gallery
> Search
> Notifications
> Settings > Wireless & networks
1: Airplane mode (On/Off)
2: 4G (On/Off)
3: 4G settings
1: 4G (On/Off) 2: Network notification (On/Off)
3: 4G tethered mode
4: Wi-Fi (On/Off)
5: Wi-Fi settings
1: Wi-Fi (On/Off) 2: Network notification (On/Off)
3: Add Wi-Fi network
SPH-D700.book Page ii Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
iii
6: Bluetooth (On/Off)
7: Bluetooth settings
1: Bluetooth (On/Off) 2: Device name
3: Visible (On/Off) 4: Scan devices
5: <detected Bluetooth devices>
8: VPN settings
1: Add VPN
9: Mobile networks
1: Data roaming (On/Off)
2: Data Roaming Guard (On/Off))
10: Dial Up Networking (On/Off)
> Settings > Call settings
1: Reject with message
2: North American dialing
3: International Dialing
4: TTY
1: TTY Off 2: TTY HCO
3: TTY VCO 4: TTY Full
5: System select
1: Sprint only 2: Automatic
6: Call Guard
7: Voicemail settings
1: Notifications 2: Pictures
3: Speakerphone 4: Change greeting
5: From name 6: Check for upgrade
7: About Voicemail
> Settings > Sound & display
Sound settings
1: Silent mode (On/Off)
2: Ringer volume
1: Incoming call volume 2: Notification volume
3: Media volume
4: System volume
5: Phone ringtone
6: Pulse notification light (On/Off)
7: Phone vibrate (On/Off)
8: Notification ringtone
9: Audible touch tones (On/Off)
10: Audible selection (On/Off)
SPH-D700.book Page iii Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
iv
11: Haptic feedback (On/Off)
12: Vibration intensity
13: SD card notifications (On/Off)
Display settings
1: Orientation (On/Off)
2: Animation
1: No animation 2: Some animations
3: All animations
3: Brightness
4: Screen timeout
1: 15 seconds 2: 30 seconds
3: 1 minute 4: 2 minutes
5: 10 minutes 6: 30 minutes
5: Power Saving Mode
6: Keyboard timeout
1: 3 seconds 2: 6 seconds
3: 15 seconds 4: Same as Screen timeout
> Settings > Location & security
My Location
1: Use wireless networks (On/Off)
2: Use GPS satellites (On/Off)
Screen unlock pattern
1: Set unlock pattern
2: Require pattern
3: Use visible pattern
4: Use tactile feedback
Passwords
1: Visible passwords (On/Off)
Credential storage
1: Use secure credentials (On/Off)
2: Install from SD card
3: Set password
4: Clear storage
SPH-D700.book Page iv Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
v
> Settings > Applications
1: Unknown sources (On/Off)
2: Quick launch
3: Manage applications
4: Running services
5: Development
1: USB debugging (On/Off)
2: Stay awake (On/Off)
3: Allow mock locations (On/Off)
> Settings > Accounts & sync
General sync settings
1: Background data (On/Off)
2: Auto-sync (On/Off)
Manage accounts
> Settings > Privacy
Location
1: Use My Location
Personal data
1: Factory data reset
> Settings > SD card &
phone storage
External SD card
1: Total space
2: Available space
3: Unmount SD card (On/Off)
4: Format SD card (On/Off)
Internal phone storage
1: Available space
> Settings > Search
Web search
1: Google search settings
1: Show web suggestions (On/Off)
2: Search history (On/Off)
3: Manage search history
SPH-D700.book Page v Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
vi
Quick Search Box
1: Searchable items
1: Contacts (On/Off) 2: Browser (On/Off)
3: Apps (On/Off) 4: Music (On/Off)
5: YouTube (On/Off) 6: Voicemail (On/Off)
2: Clear search shortcuts
> Settings > Language &
keyboard
1: Select Input Method
1: Swype 2: Android keyboard
2: Select locale
1: English 2: Español
Text settings
1: Swype (On/Off)
2: Swype (settings)
1: Language 2: Auto-spacing (On/Off)
3: Auto-capitalization (On/Off)
4: Word Prediction (On/Off)
5: Enable Tip Indicator (On/Off)
6: Audio Feedback (On/Off)
7: Vibrate on keypress (On/Off)
8: Display Trace 9: Word Choice Window
10: Speed vs. Accuracy 11: Auto-select word after
12: Swype Help 13: Tutorial
14: Version
3: Android keyboard (On/Off)
4: Android keyboard (settings)
1: Vibrate on keypress (On/Off)
2: Sound on keypress (On/Off)
3: Auto-capitalization (On/Off)
4: Voice input (On/Off)
5: Quick fixes (On/Off) 6: Show suggestion (On/Off)
7: Auto-complete (On/Off)
5: Device keyboard
1: Auto-replace (On/Off) 2: Auto-cap (On/Off)
3: Auto-punctuate (On/Off)
6: User dictionary
SPH-D700.book Page vi Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
vii
> Settings > Accessibility
Accessibility
1: Accessibility (On/Off)
Accessibility services
1: KickBack (On/Off)
2: TalkBack (On/Off)
3: SoundBack (On/Off)
> Settings > Text-to-speech
1: Listen to an example
2: Install voice data
3: Always use my settings (On/Off)
4: Speak incoming CallerID (On/Off)
Default settings
1: Speech rate
1: Very slow 2: Slow
3: Normal 4: Fast
5: Very fast
2: Language
1: American English 2: Spanish
> Settings > Date & time
1: Automatic (On/Off)
2: Set date
3: Select time zone
4: Set time
5: Use 24-hour format (On/Off)
6: Select date format
1: MM/DD/YYYY 2: DD/MM/YYYY
3: YYYY/MM/DD
> Settings > About phone
1: System Updates
1: Update Firmware 2: Update Profile
3: Update PRL 4: Update Android
SPH-D700.book Page vii Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
viii
2: Status
1: Battery status 2: My phone number
3: MIN 4: PRL Version
5: MEID 6: Network
7: Signal strength 8: Service state
9: Roaming 10: Mobile network state
11: 4G MAC address 12: Wi-Fi MAC address
13: Bluetooth address 14: Up time
3: Battery use
4: Legal information
1: Open source licenses 2: License settings
3: Google legal 4: Privacy Alert from Sprint
5: System tutorial
6: Model number
7: Firmware version
8: Baseband version
9: Kernel version
10: Build number
11: Hardware version
In Use Menu
1: Add call/Merge 2: Dialpad
3: End call 4: Speaker (On/Off)
5: Mute/Unmute 6: Bluetooth
While in an active call, press to display the
following options:
1: Contacts (image) 2: Memo
SPH-D700.book Page viii Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Section 1
Getting Started
SPH-D700.book Page 1 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2 1A. Setting Up Service
⽧Setting Up Your Device (page 2)
⽧Activating Your Device (page 5)
⽧Setting Up Your Voicemail (page 5)
⽧Sprint Account Passwords (page 6)
⽧Getting Help (page 7)
Setting Up Your Device
1. Install the battery.
䡲Remove the battery from its packaging.
䡲Grasp the device firmly and locate the cover
release latch.
䡲Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly
“pop” the cover off the device (similar to a soda
can).
䡲Insert the battery into the opening in the back of
the device, making sure the connectors align.
Gently press down to secure the battery.
1A. Setting Up Service
Release Latch
SPH-D700.book Page 2 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
1A. Setting Up Service 3
Setting Up Service
䡲Position the battery cover over the battery
compartment and press down until you hear a
click.
2. Press and hold to turn the device on.
䡲If your device is activated, it will turn on, search for
Sprint service, and enter standby mode.
3. Make your first call.
䡲Press to access the Home screen and
touch to access the onscreen keypad.
䡲Use the onscreen keypad to enter a phone
number and touch .
●If your device is in PowerSave mode, press
or to reactivate the screen.
SPH-D700.book Page 3 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
4 1A. Setting Up Service
Unlocking Your Device Screen
䊳To unlock your phone from this screen, touch and
drag the lock icon up or slide the QWERTY
keyboard out.
WARNING: If your device has a touchscreen display,
please note that a touchscreen responds best to
a light touch from the pad of your finger or a
non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a
metallic object when pressing on the
touchscreen may damage the tempered glass
surface and void the warranty. See “4B.
Manufacturer’s Warranty” on page 229.
Note: Your device’s battery should have enough charge for
your device to turn on and find a signal, set up your
voicemail, and make a call. You should fully charge
your battery as soon as possible.
Unlock Screen
SPH-D700.book Page 4 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
1A. Setting Up Service 5
Setting Up Service
Activating Your Device
䢇If you purchased your device at a Sprint Store, it is
probably activated and ready to use.
䢇If you received your device in the mail and it is for a new
Sprint account or a new line of service, it is designed to
activate automatically. To confirm your activation,
make a phone call.
䢇If you received your device in the mail and you are
activating a new device for an existing number on your
account, you will need to go online to activate your
new device.
䡲From your computer’s Web browser, go to
www.sprint.com/activate and complete the
onscreen instructions to activate your device.
When you have finished, make a phone call to
confirm your activation. If your device is still not
activated or you do not have access to the Internet,
contact Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727
for assistance.
Setting Up Your Voicemail
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered
calls to your voicemail, even if your device is in use or
turned off. You should set up your Sprint Voicemail and
personal greeting as soon as your device is activated.
Always use a password to protect against unauthorized
access.
1. From the phone standby mode, touch and
hold .
2. Follow the system prompts to:
䡲Create your password.
䡲Record your name announcement.
䡲Record your greeting.
Tip: Do not press while the device is being activated.
Pressing cancels the activation process.
Note: If you are having difficulty with activation, contact Sprint
Customer Service by dialing 1-888-211-4727 from any
other phone.
SPH-D700.book Page 5 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
6 1A. Setting Up Service
For more information about using your Visual
Voicemail, see “Visual Voicemail” on page 150.
Sprint Account Passwords
As a Sprint customer, you enjoy unlimited access to
your personal account information, your voicemail
account, and your data services account. To ensure
that no one else has access to your information, you
will need to create passwords to protect your privacy.
Account Username and Password
If you are the account owner, you will create an account
username and password when you sign on to
www.sprint.com. (Click Need to register for access? to get
started.) If you are not the account owner (if someone
else receives the bill for your Sprint service), you can
get a sub-account password at www.sprint.com.
Voicemail Password
You’ll create your voicemail password (or passcode)
when you set up your voicemail. See “Setting Up Your
Voicemail” on page 5 for more information on your
voicemail password.
Data Services Password
With your Sprint device, you may elect to set up an
optional data services password to control access and
authorize Premium Service purchases.
For more information, or to change your passwords,
sign on to www.sprint.com or call Sprint Customer
Service at 1-888-211-4727.
Note: Voicemail Password
Sprint strongly recommends that you create a
password when setting up your voicemail to protect
against unauthorized access. Without a password,
anyone who has access to your device is able to
access your voicemail messages.
SPH-D700.book Page 6 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
1A. Setting Up Service 7
Setting Up Service
Getting Help
Managing Your Account
Online: www.sprint.com
䢇Access your account information.
䢇Check your minutes used (depending on your Sprint
service plan).
䢇View and pay your bill.
䢇Enroll in Sprint online billing and automatic payment.
䢇Purchase accessories.
䢇Shop for the latest Sprint phones.
䢇View available Sprint service plans and options.
䢇Learn more about data services and other products
like Sprint Picture Mail, games, ringers, screen
savers, and more.
From Your Sprint Phone Keypad
䢇Tap to check minute usage
and account balance.
䢇Tap to make a payment.
䢇Tap to add a new line of
service, upgrade your phone, purchase accessories,
or access other account services.
䢇Tap to access a summary of
your Sprint service plan or get answers to other
questions.
From Any Other Phone
䢇Sprint Customer Service: 1-888-211-4727.
䢇Business Customer Service: 1-800-927-2199.
Sprint 411
Sprint 411 gives you access to a variety of services and
information, including residential, business, and
government listings; movie listings or showtimes;
driving directions, restaurant reservations, and major
local event information. You can get up to three pieces
of information per call, and the operator can
automatically connect your call at no additional charge.
There is a per-call charge to use Sprint 411, and you
will be billed for airtime.
䊳Tap .
PQRS
SPH-D700.book Page 7 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
8 1A. Setting Up Service
Sprint Operator Services
Sprint Operator Services provides assistance when you
place collect calls or when you place calls billed to a
local telephone calling card or third party.
䊳Tap .
For more information or to see the latest in products
and services, visit us online at www.sprint.com.
SPH-D700.book Page 8 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Section 2
Your Device
SPH-D700.book Page 9 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
10 2A. Device Basics
⽧Your Device (page 11)
⽧Viewing the Display Screen (page 15)
⽧Turning Your Device On and Off (page 18)
⽧Battery and Charger (page 19)
⽧Device Function Keys (page 23)
⽧Navigation and Customization (page 26)
⽧Displaying Your Phone Number (page 41)
⽧Entering Text Using the Android Keyboard (page 41)
⽧Entering Text Using the QWERTY Keyboard (page 51)
⽧Creating a Google Account (page 55)
2A. Device Basics
Tip: Device Software Upgrades – Updates to your device’s
software may become available from time to time. Sprint
will automatically upload critical updates to your device.
• You can also use the menu to manually check for
and download updates. Press > and tap
Settings > About phone > System Updates >
Update Firmware or Update Android to search for
and download available updates.
SPH-D700.book Page 10 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 11
Device Basics
Your Device Key Functions
1. Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to
the surface of the screen. This is typically used to
detect when your face is pressed up against the
screen, such as during a phone call.
䡲While talking on the phone, the sensor detects
talk activity and locks the keypad to prevent
accidental key presses.
2. Status Bar Icons provide information about your
device’s status and options, such as signal
strength, wireless technology, roaming, ringer
setting, messaging, and battery charge.
3. Touchscreen Display displays all the information
needed to operate your device, such as the call
status, the Contacts list, and the date and time.
Also provides one-touch access to all of your
features and applications.
4. HOME Key returns you to the Home screen. Press
and hold to open the recently-used applications
window.
3. Display
Screen
9. External
Speaker
5. MENU Key
1. Proximity
Sensor
14. LED
2. Status Bar
Icons
4. HOME Key
8. Microphone
13. Self Camera
Lens
12. Light
Sensor
10. SEARCH Key
11. BACK Key
7. Flash
6. Camera
Lens
Portrait Mode
SPH-D700.book Page 11 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
12 2A. Device Basics
5. MENU Key allows you to access your device’s main
functions menu: Add, Wallpaper, Search,
Notifications, and Settings. While in a menu, press
to open a list of actions available from the current
screen or onscreen option.
䡲During an active call, press to open additional call
options such as Contacts or Memo.
6. Camera Lens, as part of the built-in camera, this
5.0 megapixel camera lets you take pictures and
videos.
7. Flash, as part of the built-in camera, provides an
additional light source for pictures during low-light
conditions.
8. Microphone allows other callers to hear you clearly
when you are speaking to them.
9. External Speaker lets you hear the different ringers
and sounds. You can mute the ringer when
receiving incoming calls by pressing the volume
button. The speaker also lets you hear the caller’s
voice in speakerphone mode.
10. SEARCH Key displays the Quick Search box that
can be used to search for a key term both on the
device and online. It’s the ultimate search field
(page 24).
䡲For example, entering the word “Pa”, will display
any matching entries from your device’s Contacts
list, current device applications, online Android/
Google apps, or from any online Web page via
Google™ search.
䡲Press and hold to launch Voice Search where you
can initiate a Google™ search by verbally entering
a text string. The device recognizes your spoken
words and initiates a Web search.
11. BACK Key returns you to the previous menu, closes
a dialog box, or exits an onscreen menu/option.
12. Light sensor lets you use the ambient light level to
adjust the screen brightness/contrast.
䡲In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors
cause the device to increase the brightness and
contrast for better viewing.
䡲In dim light conditions, the device increases the
screen brightness to compensate.
SPH-D700.book Page 12 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 13
Device Basics
13. Self Camera Lens, for use with the Qik application,
take pictures while facing the screen, and allows
you to video conference.
14. Front Indicator Light (LED) displays a device
notification, charging status, or alert.
15. Earpiece lets you hear the caller and automated
prompts.
16. Volume Button allows you to adjust the ringer
volume in standby mode, the voice volume during
a call, and media playback volume.
17. Camera Button lets you activate the camera and
camcorder and take pictures and videos.
18. Charger/Accessory Jack allows you to connect the
phone charger or a USB cable (included).
CAUTION! Inserting an accessory into the incorrect
jack may damage the device.
19. microSD Card Slot lets you use a microSD card to
expand the memory of your phone. (A 16GB
SDHC card comes preinstalled in your Epic 4G.)
16. Volume
Button
18. Charger/Accessory
Jack
17. Camera
Button
15. Earpiece
20. Headset Jack
21. Power
Button
19. microSD
Card Slot
SPH-D700.book Page 13 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
14 2A. Device Basics
20. Headset Jack allows you to plug in an optional
headset for convenient, hands-free conversations.
CAUTION! Inserting an accessory into the incorrect
jack may damage the device.
21. POWER Button lets you turn the device on or off,
or turn off the touchscreen display.
䡲When the screen is turned off, press once to
return to Screen lock mode.
䡲While the device is unlocked and not on an active
call, press and hold to display the Phone options
menu (Silent mode, Airplane mode, Power off).
Landscape Phone Features
1. QWERTY Keyboard provides an alphanumeric
character keyboard layout. Lets you enter numbers,
letters, and characters, as well as navigate within
menus.
2. Fn Key (Function) key lets you enter the
alternate character or symbol displayed on each
key on the QWERTY keyboard.
3. Shift Key lets you toggle alphabet characters
between mixed case, uppercase, and lowercase.
Character case remains as selected until the Shift
key is pressed again.
4. Smiley Key ( ) lets you access Smiley icons
(Emoticons).
5. Space Key lets you add spaces between words
and characters.
5. Space Key
9. Delete Key
7. Enter
Key
8. Function
Keys
3. Shift
Key
2. Fn Key
6. Navigation Keys
4. Smiley Key
1. QWERTY
Keyboard
Landscape
Mode
SPH-D700.book Page 14 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 15
Device Basics
6. Navigation Keys allow you to navigate around your
device’s menu options while in Landscape mode.
7. Enter Key lets you enter additional lines of text.
8. Function Keys allows you to access your device’s
main functions while in Landscape mode (Menu
and Back on the left, Home and Search on the
right). These buttons function in the same manner
as those below the display screen.
9. Delete Key deletes characters from the display in
text entry mode.
Viewing the Display Screen
Your device’s display screen provides information
about your device’s status and options. This list
identifies the symbols you’ll see on your device’s
display screen:
Status Bar – Service Icons
Activation Not Completed – Your automatic
device activation process failed, please retry.
Signal Strength – Shows your current signal
strength. (More bars = stronger signal.)
No Service – Your device cannot find a usable
signal.
Airplane Mode On – Your device will not make or
receive calls, or provide data access. Local
applications are still available.
Roaming – Your device is “roaming” off the
Nationwide Sprint Network.
3G Available – Sprint 3G data service is active.
3G Communicating – Sprint 3G data service is
active and communicating. When active, the
icon is animated.
4G Service Available – Sprint 4G is turned on
and coverage is available.
4G Service Communicating – Sprint 4G is turned
on and coverage is available although your
signal is weak.
SPH-D700.book Page 15 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
16 2A. Device Basics
4G Service Unavailable – There is no 4G
coverage currently unavailable. You are
disconnected from the 4G network. (See “4G
Services” on page 179.)
Status Bar – Status Icons
Call in Progress – A voice call is in progress.
Audio is routed through either the earpiece or
external speaker.
Bluetooth Call in Progress – A voice call is being
routed through a Bluetooth headset.
Missed Call – You have missed an incoming
call.
Call Muted – The device microphone has been
muted.
Speaker – Speakerphone feature is enabled.
Battery Strength – Shows your current battery
charge level. (Icon shown is fully charged.)
Battery Low – Shows your current battery
charge level is very low.
Status Bar – Service Icons
Device Power Critical – Shows your current
battery only has five percent power remaining
and will immediately shutdown. Represented as
a blinking icon.
Bluetooth Active – Bluetooth technology is
active and enabled.
Bluetooth Connected – Bluetooth technology is
active and communicating with an external
device.
GPS Location On – Device location feature is on
and available for location-based services such
as GPS Navigation (see page 211).
GPS Communicating – Device location feature is
on and communicating.
Wi-Fi Connected – Wi-Fi is connected, active,
and communicating with a Wireless Access
Point (WAP).
Wi-Fi Connection Issue – Wi-Fi is active but there
is a communication issue with the target
Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Status Bar – Status Icons
SPH-D700.book Page 16 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 17
Device Basics
Sprint Hotspot Active – The Sprint Hotpost
feature has been activated (page 181).
microSD Unmounted – The External SD card
(internal microSD) has been disconnected
(unmounted) from the device and is now ready
for either removal or formatting.
Preparing for Mounting – The External SD card
is being prepared for mounting to the device.
This is required for communication with the
External SD card.
USB Connection – The device has detected an
active USB connection.
USB Debug Connection – The device has
detected an active USB connection and is in a
USB Debugging mode.
Sign-in/Sync Error – There has been an issue
with your connection to the Google server, or
you were not properly signed into your account.
In order to use Google application or sync
features, you must set up and sign into an active
Google account.
Status Bar – Status Icons
Silence All – All incoming sounds are turned off.
Vibrate Only – The ringer is set to vibrate only.
Data Synchronization – Application sync is
active and synchronization is in progress for
Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.
Android OS Update Available – A new Android
operating system update is available for
download.
System Updates Available – A new system
update is available for download.
Files Downloading – The device is downloading
selected files.
Download Successful – A recent software
download was successfully downloaded.
Calendar Reminder – Shows you have a
reminder of an upcoming Calendar event.
Status Bar – Status Icons
SPH-D700.book Page 17 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
18 2A. Device Basics
Turning Your Device On and Off
Turning Your Device On
䊳Press and hold .
Once your device is on, it may display “Searching for
Service.” When your device finds a signal, it enters
standby mode – the device’s idle state. At this point,
you are ready to begin making and receiving calls.
If your device is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes
of searching, a Power Save feature is automatically
activated. When a signal is found, your device
automatically returns to standby mode.
In Power Save mode, your device searches for a signal
periodically without your intervention. You can also
initiate a search for Sprint service by pressing any key
(when your device is turned on).
Turning Your Device Off
1. Press and hold for two seconds until you
see the Phone options menu.
2. Tap Power off and then tap OK to power off
the device.
Your screen remains blank while your device is off
(unless the battery is charging).
Status Bar – Messaging Icons
Text Message – You have new text (SMS) or
multimedia (MMS) messages.
Voicemail Message – You have a new voicemail
messages.
Voicemail Message – You have multiple new
voicemail messages.
New Email message – Shows you have received
either a new Internet email message or Outlook
email message via an Exchange server.
New Gmail message – Shows you have received
a new Gmail message.
Alarm – You have an alarm event.
3
Tip: The Power Save feature conserves your battery power
when you are in an area where there is no signal.
SPH-D700.book Page 18 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 19
Device Basics
Battery and Charger
Sprint-approved or Samsung-approved batteries and
accessories can be found at Sprint Stores or through
Samsung; or call 1-866-866-7509 to order. They’re also
available at www.sprint.com.
Battery Capacity
Your device is equipped with a Lithium Ion (Li-Ion)
battery. It allows you to recharge your battery before it is
fully drained. The battery provides up to 6.0 hours of
continuous digital talk time.
At 5% of charge capacity, there are only a few minutes
of talk time left, the device sounds an audible alert,
displays a critical charge icon ( ), and then turns
off.
Installing the Battery
䊳See “Setting Up Your Device” on page 2.
Removing the Battery
1. Make sure the power is off so that you don’t lose
any stored numbers or messages.
2. Grasp the device firmly, locate the cover release
latch, and then place your fingernail in the opening
and firmly “pop” the cover off the device.
3. Carefully remove the battery from the device.
WARNING: Use only Sprint-approved or Samsung-approved
batteries and chargers with your device. The
failure to use a Sprint-approved or Samsung-
approved battery and charger may increase the
risk that your device will overheat, catch fire, or
explode, resulting in serious bodily injury, death,
or property damage.
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate
mode, browser use, and other variables may reduce
the battery’s talk and standby times.
Tip: Watch your device’s battery level indicator and charge the
battery before it runs out of power.
WARNING: Do not handle a damaged or leaking Li-Ion
battery as you can be burned.
SPH-D700.book Page 19 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
20 2A. Device Basics
Charging the Battery
Keeping track of your battery’s charge is important. If
your battery level becomes too low, your device
automatically turns off, and you will lose any
information you were just working on.
1. Connect the USB cable to the charging head.
Release Latch
Note: Although the battery comes partially charged. It is
recommended you fully charge the battery before
using your device for the first time.
Incorrect
Correct
USB Cable
Charging Head
SPH-D700.book Page 20 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 21
Device Basics
2. Slide open the Charger/Accessory jack cover.
3. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/
Accessory jack.
4. Plug the charging head into a standard AC power
outlet.
Always use a Sprint-approved or Samsung-approved
desktop charger, travel charger, or vehicle power
adapter to charge your battery.
䊳Plug the flat end of the charger into the device’s
charger jack and the other end into an electrical
outlet. The device turns on with the screen locked
and indicates both its charge state and percent of
charge.
With the Sprint-approved Li-Ion battery, you can
recharge the battery before it becomes completely run
down.
Extending Your Battery Life
Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and
GPS functionality all act to drain your battery. The
following is a list of helpful tips that can help conserve
your battery power:
䢇Reduce your backlight on time. (See “Changing the
Backlight Time Length” on page 69.)
䢇Turn Bluetooth off when not in use. (See “Turning
Bluetooth On and Off” on page 142.)
Correct
Incorrect
Charger/Accessory Jack
Note: The front LED turns red to indicate the battery is
currently charging.
SPH-D700.book Page 21 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
22 2A. Device Basics
䢇Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use. (See “Turning Wi-Fi
On and Off” on page 177.)
䢇Turn 4G off when not in use. (See “Turning 4G On
and Off” on page 180.)
䢇Turn off Sprint Hotspot (Wi-Fi hotspot) services when
not in use. This is one of the largest drains on your
battery as it is not only transmitting a Wi-Fi
connection to your devices but is also doing it while
using a 4G connection. (See “Sprint Mobile Hotspot”
on page 181.)
䢇Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most
applications using this function will periodically query
the GPS satellites for your current location; each
query drains your battery. (See “Activating Location
Mode” on page 211.)
䢇Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted
before charging your device. Repeating this process
of a complete discharge and recharge can over time
reduce the storage capacity of any battery.
䢇Turn off Automatic application sync. (See
“Synchronizing Accounts” on page 73.)
䢇Use the Power Control Widget to deactivate hardware
functions such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS,
Synchronization, or LCD brightness setting. (See
“Adding and Removing Widgets” on page 35.)
䢇Check the Battery use screen to review what features
or functions have been consuming your battery
resources. (See “Viewing Battery Use” on page 70.)
䢇Check the Running Services and close any
unnecessary applications. (See “Manage Running
Services” on page 84.)
䢇Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown
background applications that are still running. These
minimized applications can, over time, cause your
device to “slow down”. (See “Using the Task
Manager” on page 84.)
䢇Animated wallpapers use processing power,
memory, and more power. Change your Live
Wallpaper to a non-animated Wallpaper gallery or
Gallery image. (See “Changing the Display Screen”
on page 70.)
SPH-D700.book Page 22 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 23
Device Basics
Device Function Keys
The Epic™ 4G comes equipped with four main function
keys that can be used on any screen.
Menu Key
The Menu key ( ) activates an available menu
function for the current screen or application. When on
the Home screen, the following menu options are
available:
䡲Add ( ) adds one of the following functions to
a selected screen: Samsung Widgets, Android
Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, and Wallpapers. (See
“Customizing Your Home Screen” on page 33.)
䡲Wallpaper ( ) lets you to customize the current
screen’s wallpaper image. You can obtain this
image from either your Pictures folder, from any of
the available images within the device’s
Wallpaper gallery, or from the animated Live
Wallpapers. (See “Changing the Display Screen”
on page 70.)
䡲Search ( ) displays the Quick Search box that
you can use to search for a key term both on the
phone and online. (See “Using the Search Key”
on page 24.)
●For example, entering the word “Pa”, will
display any matching entries from your
device’s Contacts list, current device
applications, online Android/Google apps, or
from any online Web page via Google search.
䡲Notifications ( ) allows you to expand popup
notifications area to provide more detailed
information about the current onscreen
notification icons. (See “Using the Notifications
Panel” on page 40.)
䡲Settings ( ) provides quick access to the
device’s settings menu. (See “2C. Settings” on
page 66.)
●The Settings menu can also be accessed by
pressing and tapping > .
SPH-D700.book Page 23 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
24 2A. Device Basics
Home Key
The Home key ( ) takes you back to your Home
screen (#4 of the 7 total available screens).
Back Key
The Back key ( ) returns you to the previously
active screen. If the onscreen keyboard is currently
open, this key closes the keyboard.
Using the Search Key
The Search key ( ) displays the Quick Search box
that can be used to search for a key term both on the
phone and online. In some instances, this key opens a
search box specific only to the current application.
䡲Press to launch the Quick Search box.
䡲Press and hold to launch the Voice Search
function.
Using Your Device to Search
Use the Quick Search box
to manually enter a term
or number that is
searched for
automatically on both
your device and on the
Web.
Touching Voice Search
( ) initiates the same
search function but
without the need to use
the onscreen or
QWERTY keyboards.
You can also use this
feature to dial a phone
number and it is a
supplement to the
current Automatic
Speech Recognition
(ASR) feature. (See “2G. Voice Services” on page 119.)
Quick Search
Box
Voice Search
Search Matches
(Device & Web)
SPH-D700.book Page 24 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 25
Device Basics
To search the phone and Web by entering text:
1. Press to launch the Quick Search box.
2. Use either the QWERTY or onscreen keyboard to
enter your search term. (See either “Entering Text
Using the Android Keyboard” on page 41 or
“Entering Text Using the QWERTY Keyboard” on
page 51.)
䡲As you type, matching items on your device and
matches from Google’s Web search are added to
the onscreen list of previously chosen search
results.
䡲Search preferences and settings can be
configured to display suggestions in a different
manner. (See “Search Settings” on page 76.)
3. Touch a desired match from the list of suggestions,
phone search results, or previously chosen search
matches. Once touched, the item opens in the
appropriate application.
– or –
If what you’re searching for is not in the current list,
touch the Google Search icon ( ) in Quick
Search box or on the keyboard to initiate a new
search on the Web.
To search the phone and Web via Voice Search:
1. Press and touch (microphone icon on
the side of the Quick Search box).
2. From the open dialog, say what you want to search
for.
3. Once complete, the Voice Search application
analyzes your spoken words and displays a list of
matching keyword terms.
Note: There might be instances within an application where
pressing reveals only an application-specific
search. Press twice to open the Quick Search
box.
Note: To hide the onscreen keyboard and see more of your
search matches, press .
Note: Touching in an application’s search box,
searches the application by voice, not the Web.
SPH-D700.book Page 25 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
26 2A. Device Basics
To use additional Voice Search functions:
From an open Voice Search dialog, speak the following
words to access additional features:
䡲Directions to allows you to initiate a navigation
session via Google maps. Use either an Address
name, Business name, business type, or other
navigation information to get the desired
directions.
䡲Navigate to allows you to receive directions via
Google maps™. Use either an Address name,
Business name, business type, or other
navigation information to get the desired
directions.
䡲Map of allows you to view a map of an area via
Google maps. Use either an Address name,
Business name, zip code, or other navigation
information.
Navigation and Customization
The Epic 4G™ is a touch-sensitive device which allows
you to not only select an onscreen option with a single
tap, but also scroll through long menu lists. Simply
slide up and down through the display with your
fingertip.
Home Screen Overview
The Home screen is the starting point for many
applications and functions, and it allows you to add
items like application icons, shortcuts, folders, or
Google widgets to give you instant access to
information and applications. This is the default page
and accessible from any menu by pressing .
䢇Status bar: located at the top of the screen, displays
both Notification and Status icons.
Note: It is recommended that you use this feature in a quiet
room. Loud ambient or background noises can
confuse the application and result in inaccurate search
results.
Tip: Some menu options are also accessed by pressing and
holding an onscreen item, such as a Contact entry from
the Contacts tab.
SPH-D700.book Page 26 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 27
Device Basics
䢇Notification area: displays icons associated with
end-user notifications such as: email messages,
calls (missed, call in progress), new voicemail,
upcoming event, USB connection, emails, and Text/
MMS messages. (See “Using the Notifications Panel”
on page 40.)
䡲These notifications appear at the top-left of the
screen (within the Status bar) and display
important user information.
䡲This information can be accessed by either
swiping down from the Status bar (page 40) or by
accessing the Notifications panel >
Notifications ().
䢇Status area: displays icons associated with the status
of the device such as communication, coverage,
Bluetooth, 3G/4G and Wi-Fi communication, battery
levels, GPS, etc.
䢇Main Home Screen: a customizable screen (#4) that
provides information about notifications and device
status, and allows access to application Widgets.
Status bar
Main Home
Shortcuts
Notification area
Status area
Screen
Google search
Primary Shortcuts
SPH-D700.book Page 27 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
28 2A. Device Basics
䢇Extended Home Screens: the device’s screen extends
beyond the current visible screen width to provide
more space for adding icons, widgets, and more.
䡲There are seven available screens. Each screen
shares use of the four Primary Shortcuts (see
page 29). Each of these screens can be
customized.
䡲The current screen is indicated at the top by a
larger circle. Up to seven (7) total screens are
available.
䡲Press to access the main Home screen
(page 27), which appears as the default “page”
on the device, and then slide your finger
horizontally across the screen to go to the left or
right extended screens.
䡲Think of it as having a desktop so wide that your
screen can only display a portion at a time.
䢇Google search: an onscreen Internet search engine
powered by Google™. Touch to access the
Voice Search feature where you can verbally enter a
search term and initiate an online search.
Note: Both the Status bar and Primary shortcuts are visible
across all screens (Home and Extended).
Tip: While on an extended Home screen, press to
return to the main Home screen.
Note: Screen #4 is the Home screen.
Available Screens (7)
Widget
Primary Shortcuts
SPH-D700.book Page 28 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 29
Device Basics
䢇Widgets: are self-contained onscreen applications
(not shortcuts). These can be placed onto any of the
available screens (Home or Extended). (See “Adding
and Removing Widgets” on page 35.)
䢇Shortcuts: are icons that launch available device
applications such as Voicemail, Contacts, Phone,
Email, Alarm Clock, etc. These function the same as
shortcuts on your computer.
䡲Although some may already be found on the
Extended Home screens, the majority can also be
found within the Applications screens.
䡲The Application screens can be accessed by
tapping Applications ( ) from the Primary
shortcuts area.
䡲Shortcuts can be pulled out from these screens or
deleted (removed from a screen until needed
again later). (See “Creating Shortcuts” on
page 33.)
䢇Primary Shortcuts: are four shortcuts present
throughout all of the available screens (all 7) and can
be used to both navigate within the device or launch
any of the following functions:
䡲Phone ( ) launches the phone-related screen
functions (Keypad, Call Log, Favorites, and
Contacts).
䡲Contacts ( ) launches the Contacts-related
screens (Contacts, Groups, and Activities).
䡲Messaging ( ) launches the Messaging menu
(create new messages or open an existing
message string).
䡲Applications/Home toggles functionality between
the Home and Application functions.
●Tap Applications ( ) to access the
Application screens loaded with every
available local application.
●While in the Applications screens, tap it again
to easily return to the Home screen.
SPH-D700.book Page 29 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
30 2A. Device Basics
Using the Applications Screens
All of your device’s applications are located within the
Applications screens.
1. Press and tap
to open the screen.
䡲To close the Applications
screen, tap or press
.
2. Scroll through the screens
and tap an icon to launch
the associated application.
䡲The screens contains device applications such as
Alarm Clock, AllShare, Browser, Camera, Gmail,
Market, Sprint Hotspot, YouTube, and many more.
Applications
The following is a listing of the current applications
available via both the Primary shortcuts area and via
the Applications screens.
Note: These screens house all default and downloaded
applications (installed from Android Market or from the
Web).
Note: These screens can be
displayed as a list by
pressing and
tapping List view.
Application Icons
Alarm Clock – Accesses the Alarm Clock
application (page 113).
AllShare – Allows users to share their in-device
media content with other external devices using
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance)
technology (page 209). The external devices
must also be DLNA-compliant.
Amazon MP3 – Launches the Amazon MP3
music download service (page 206).
Asphalt 5 – Launches a demo version of a built-
in racing video game.
Browser – Launches the Sprint Powerdeck
browser running Google search (page 168).
Calculator – Launches the onscreen calculator
application (page 115).
MP3
SPH-D700.book Page 30 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 31
Device Basics
Calendar – Launches the Calendar application
that syncs itself to either your Google or
Outlook® Work calendar (page 106). Events can
only be synced to a managed account
(page 73).
Camera – Launches the built-in camera
(page 131).
Contacts – Displays the Contacts tab listing
current contacts, synced from either your
Google or Outlook account (page 92). Contacts
can only be synced to a managed account
(page 73).
Email – Provides access to both your Outlook
(Exchange Server-based) work email and
Internet email accounts (such as Google, Yahoo,
etc.) (page 182).
Facebook – Launches the Facebook Web page
via the browser (page 170).
Gallery – Displays a Gallery of camera images
and video stored in the microSD card
(page 135).
Gmail – Provides access to your Gmail account
(page 183).
Application Icons
JANUARY
Maps – Launches a Web-based dynamic map
that helps you find local businesses, locate
friends, view maps and get driving directions
(page 211).
Market – Browse and search for applications on
Android Market (page 196).
Memo – Creates new text memos (page 113).
Messaging – Provides access to your text
messaging application (SMS) (page 156).
Music – Launches the built-in Music Player
(page 206).
My files – Launches a file browser that allows
you to view only supported image files and text
files (page 112).
NASCAR – Launches the Web-based NASCAR
Sprint Cup Mobile application (page 197).
Phone – Accesses the phone keypad (page 56).
Qik – Allows you to record and share live video
from your device with your friends, family and
your favorite social networks (page 200).
Application Icons
SPH-D700.book Page 31 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
32 2A. Device Basics
Settings – Accesses the device’s built-in
Settings menu (page 66).
Sprint Football Live – Launches the Sprint
Football Live services (page 199).
Sprint Hotspot – Launches the Sprint Mobile
Hotspot which allows you to share your phone’s
3G/4G mobile Internet connection with Wi-Fi-
enabled devices (page 181).
Sprint Navigation – Launches a built-in GPS
functionality, giving you access to a number of
location-based services (page 213).
Sprint TV – Allows you to watch live mobile TV
and listen to streaming radio on your device
(page 205).
Sprint Zone – Accesses links to Sprint Zone
services such as Account Information, What’s
New, recommended Android applications, and
other support and promotional content
(page 200).
Talk – Launches a Web-based Google Talk
application that lets you chat with family and
friends over the Internet for free.
Application Icons
talk
ThinkFree Office – Provides access to a
Microsoft® Office-compatible Office® suite. It also
provides a centralized location for the
management of your online and offline files.
Voice Dialer – Launches your device’s built-in
automatic speech recognition (ASR) software,
called Voice Control, to dial a phone number in
your Contacts or to launch phone functions
(page 119).
Voice Search – Launches your device’s built-in
automatic speech recognition (ASR) software
and initiates a Google search based on the
recognized text (page 122).
Voicemail – Launches Visual Voicemail
(page 150).
YouTube – Launches the YouTube webpage via
the browser (page 170).
Note: The Email application includes access to both
Exchange Server-based email (also known as Work
email) and other Internet-based email providers such
as Yahoo! and Gmail.
Application Icons
SPH-D700.book Page 32 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 33
Device Basics
Customizing Your Home Screen
You can customize your Home screen by doing the
following:
䢇Creating Shortcuts
䢇Adding and Removing Widgets
䢇Repositioning Widgets
䢇Creating Folders
䢇Changing the Background (Wallpapers)
Creating Shortcuts
Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen
Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts
activate a feature, action, or launch an application.
To add a shortcut from the Applications tab:
1. Press to activate the Home screen.
2. Select a location
(screen) for your new
shortcut by scrolling
across your available
screens until you reach
the desired one. (See
“Home Screen
Overview” on page 26.)
3. Tap Applications ()
to reveal all your current
available applications.
By default, applications
are listed in a Grid view.
4. Scroll across the
screens and locate your
desired application.
5. Touch and hold the onscreen icon. The new
shortcut then appears to hover over the current
screen.
6. While still holding the onscreen icon, position it on
the current screen. Once complete, release the
screen to lock the shortcut into its new position.
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must
first be deleted from its current screen. Activate the new
screen, and then add the selected shortcut.
SPH-D700.book Page 33 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
34 2A. Device Basics
To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen:
1. Press to activate the Home screen.
2. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
3. From the Add to Home
screen window tap
Shortcuts.
4. Tap a selection from the
available list:
䡲Applications
䡲Bookmark
䡲Contact
䡲Direct dial
䡲Direct message
䡲Directions & Navigation
䡲Gmail label
䡲Music playlist
䡲Settings
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to add the new
shortcut to your current Home screen.
To delete a shortcut:
1. Press to
activate the Home
screen.
2. Touch and hold the
desired shortcut. This
unlocks it from its
location on the current
screen.
3. Drag the icon over the
Delete tab ( )
and release it.
Note: The same shortcut can be added to any of the
available screens (Home or Extended). The application
you add to the screen will still appear within the
Applications tab.
Delete (Shortcut or Widget)
SPH-D700.book Page 34 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 35
Device Basics
Adding and Removing Widgets
Widgets are self-contained applications that can be
placed on either a Home or Extended screen. Unlike a
shortcut, Widgets appear as an onscreen applications.
There are two sets of Widgets: Samsung Widgets and
Android Widgets.
䢇Samsung Widgets
䡲Choices include: AccuWeather Clock, Buddies
now, Calendar Clock, Feeds and Update, Program
Monitor, and Y! Finance Clock.
䢇Android Widgets
䡲Choices include: Analog clock, Facebook, Music,
NASCAR, Picture frame, Power Control, Search,
Sprint Football Live, Sprint TV, Voicemail, and
YouTube.
To add a Widget:
1. Press to activate the Home screen.
2. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
3. From the Add to Home screen window tap Samsung
Widgets or Android Widgets.
4. Tap an available Widget to place it on your current
screen.
To remove a Widget:
1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it
around on the screen.
2. Drag the widget over the Delete tab ( ) and
release it.
䡲As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items
turn red.
䡲This action does not delete the Widget, just
removes it from the current screen.
To place a Widget onto a different screen:
1. Follow the steps to remove the Widget from the
current screen (page 35).
2. Touch and drag across your screen to view
another available screen (there are seven available
screens [1 Home and 6 Extended screens]).
Note: A Widget cannot be dragged from a current screen to
an adjacent screen. It must first be removed from its
current location, and then added back to a new current
screen.
SPH-D700.book Page 35 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
36 2A. Device Basics
3. Follow the steps to add a Widget to the current
screen (page 35).
Creating and Managing Folders
Folders are located on any of the three available
screens and can contain both files (such as data and
images) and Contact information or entries.
To create a folder onscreen:
1. Press to activate the Home screen.
2. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
3. From the Add to Home screen window tap Folders.
4. Tap an available folder type to place it on your
current screen.
䡲Choices include New folder, All contacts, Contacts
with phone numbers, Facebook Phonebook,
Received list from Bluetooth, Recent documents, or
Starred contacts.
Accessing Recently-Used Applications
Your device keeps a running list of your six most
recently used applications.
1. Press and hold
to open the recently-used
applications window.
2. Tap an icon to open an
application.
Changing the Screen
Orientation
The Epic 4G™ is capable of
automatically changing the
orientation of some onscreen
content. The device’s built-in
6-axis accelerometer senses
movement and changes its angle/orientation.
This allows the device to change the onscreen content
(images, video, Web pages) to properly display based
on the current angle (some screens may not
automatically change and can require sliding open or
closing the screen).
Note: To move a Widget from one screen to another, it must
first be deleted from its current screen. Activate the new
screen, and then add the Widget.
Note: Starred contacts are those Contact entries tagged as
very important.
SPH-D700.book Page 36 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 37
Device Basics
Although most screens will change orientation once
the QWERTY keyboard is opened, this feature can be
manually enabled to change the orientation for all
applicable screens when rotation is detected.
To manually activate the auto-rotate feature:
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display.
– or –
Press and tap > > Sound &
display.
2. Scroll down and tap Orientation. A checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled. (See “Changing
the Screen Orientation” on page 69.)
䡲Clear the Orientation checkmark to disable this
automatic orientation adjustment.
Portrait View
Landscape View
Note: An example of a screen that does not automatically
re-orient is the Home screen. This screens requires you
slide out the QWERTY keyboard.
An example of a screen that automatically re-orients by
moving the device is the Contacts screen. This only
requires you to turn the device on its side.
SPH-D700.book Page 37 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
38 2A. Device Basics
Menu Navigation
There are two ways to navigate through a menu:
䢇Using your finger (page 38)
䢇Using the built-in keyboard’s navigation/arrow keys
(page 38)
Selecting Menu Items Using Your Fingers
As you navigate through the menu, you activate menu
options by tapping the onscreen entry. Select any
option by tapping it.
1. Tap an onscreen icon
to launch a menu or
feature.
2. Scroll your finger
across the screen to
navigate through a
menu list (bottom up or
top down).
3. Tap a menu item to make a selection or activate a
field.
To launch the keypad using your fingers:
䊳Tap from the Home screen.
Selecting Menu Items Using Your Keyboard
As you navigate through a menu with these navigation
keys, options are highlighted. Select any option by
pressing a directional arrow from the QWERTY
keyboard and moving the onscreen selection,
highlighting it and pressing .
䡲If the option is numbered, you can select it by
pressing the corresponding number on the
phone’s keypad.
Access the QWERTY keyboard and locate the
navigation keys, located at the right of the keyboard.
SPH-D700.book Page 38 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 39
Device Basics
To view your text messages using the directional keys:
1. Use the navigation keys until is highlighted
and press . (If you have any text messages,
they are displayed.)
2. Press Up or Down to highlight an available
message and press to view its content.
Backing Up Within a Menu
To go to the previous menu:
䊳Press .
To return to Home screen:
䊳Press .
Using Context Menus
Context menus (also called popup menus) contain
tools that apply to a specific item on the screen. They
function similar to those menu options available on
your computer when you use a right-mouse click.
You open a context menu by touching and holding an
onscreen item.
Up
Left
Right
Enter
Down
SPH-D700.book Page 39 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
40 2A. Device Basics
Using the Notifications Panel
The Notification area indicates new message events
(data sync status, new messages, calendar events, call
status, etc). You can expand this area to provide more
detailed information about the current onscreen
notification icons.
1. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.
2. Tap a notification entry to open the associated
application.
Note: Not all items have context menus. If you touch and hold
an item that has no context menu, nothing happens.
Note: The Notifications panel can also be opened on the
Home screen by pressing and then tapping
Notifications.
SPH-D700.book Page 40 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 41
Device Basics
Launching Additional Panel Functions
In addition to notifications, this panel also provides
quick and ready access to four device functions. These
can be quickly activated or deactivated.
The following functions can either be activated (green)
or deactivated (gray): Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, 4G, or GPS.
Displaying Your Phone Number
䊳Press > and tap >
About phone > Status. (Your phone number and
other information about your device and account is
displayed.)
Entering Text Using the Android
Keyboard
When you activate a field where you can enter text,
numbers, symbols, etc., you can either use the
onscreen keyboard or QWERTY keyboard.
There are two versions of the onscreen keyboard
available on your Epic 4G: the Android keyboard, which
emulates a standard QWERTY keyboard, and Swype
(default input method), which uses a unique gliding
method to let you enter whole words quickly. This
section primarily covers the Android keyboard method.
Note: 4G and Wi-Fi connections can not be simultaneously
active. To activate 4G services, you must turn Wi-Fi off
on your Epic 4G.
SPH-D700.book Page 41 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
42 2A. Device Basics
Onscreen keyboard entry can be done in either Portrait
or Landscape orientations. The Landscape orientation
provides more space and results in slightly bigger
onscreen keys. If you find that you prefer to enter text
via the onscreen keyboard, and need bigger keys, use
this orientation.
(To use the onscreen keyboard in landscape mode,
you will need to set your device to automatically
change orientation when rotated. See “Changing the
Screen Orientation” on page 69.)
Choosing Android Keyboard or Swype
1. Press > and tap > Language &
keyboard > Select Input Method.
2. Tap either Swype or Android keyboard.
– or –
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the
input field to reveal an onscreen keyboard, and
then touch and hold the text input field to display
the onscreen context menu.
2. Select Input method and then touch Swype or
Android keyboard.
Selecting a Text Input Mode With the
Android Keyboard
Note: Although the default text input method is the Swype
method, if Swype input is not enabled within the
device’s settings menu, it will not be provided as an
available input method option. (See “Entering Text
Using Swype” on page 45.)
Note: Some characters and types, such as some symbols
and emoticons, are not accessible from the onscreen
keyboard.
Default Input
Method
SPH-D700.book Page 42 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 43
Device Basics
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the
input field to reveal the onscreen keyboard.
2. With Android keyboard as your text entry method,
select one of the following text mode options:
䡲ABC to use alphabetic characters from the
onscreen keyboard (See page 44.)
䡲?123 to enter numbers by pressing the numbers
on the onscreen keyboard. (See page 45.)
䡲Voice Input allows the device to use its built-in
voice recognition software to hear your voice and
transcript it directly into text.
Android Keyboard Overview
䢇Entry field: a field where text, numbers, or other
characters can be entered.
䢇Suggested Word choices: a row of selectable word
choices based on the current set of entered text. Tap
an onscreen choice to insert the selection into your
text entry field at the current cursor position.
Tap the gray left and right arrows on this field to
reveal additional word choices.
Tip: When entering text, tap to change letter
capitalization.
Entry field
Delete
Caps/ALT
Text mode
Voice Input
Enter
Recipient
Send
Suggested
words
SPH-D700.book Page 43 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
44 2A. Device Basics
䢇Delete: deletes characters from the entry field.
䢇CAPS/ALT: When in ABC mode, this key changes the
capitalization of the subsequent entered characters.
When in ?123 mode, this key can show additional
symbol characters.
䡲Capitalization in Abc mode can be altered by
using the Caps button. See “ABC Mode” on
page 44.
䡲Symbols used in ?123 mode can be enhanced by
accessing additional symbol characters. See
“Entering Numbers and Symbols” on page 45.
䢇Text mode: There are two available modes: ABC and
?123.
䡲ABC mode contains only letters. Text mode button
indicates .
䡲?123 mode contains only numbers and symbols.
Text mode button indicates .
䢇Voice Input mode: Tapping this button activates the
built-in microphone and voice recognition software.
䡲Speak clearly into the microphone. When
complete, your spoken words are recognized,
converted to text, and inserted into your current
cursor position.
ABC Mode
In ABC mode, you can enter only letters from the
onscreen keyboard. The text mode key shows .
1. Select the ABC mode ( ). (See “Selecting a Text
Input Mode With the Android Keyboard” on
page 42.)
䡲Capitalization in ABC mode can be altered by
using the Caps button.
next character is lowercase.
only the next character is uppercase.
all subsequent characters are uppercase.
?123
ABC
Note: It is recommended that to avoid incorrect conversions,
you use this feature in an area relatively free from
background noises.
Note: A green circle on the shift key above indicates the
keyboard is set to “Shift-Lock” where all characters are
entered in uppercase.
?123
?123
SPH-D700.book Page 44 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 45
Device Basics
2. Tap the corresponding onscreen keys to begin
typing your word.
䡲If you make a mistake, tap to erase a single
character. Touch and hold to erase all
previously entered words.
By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and
the following letters are lower case. After a character is
entered, the cursor automatically advances to the next
space after two seconds or when you enter a character
on a different key.
Entering Numbers and Symbols
By using the onscreen keyboard in Portrait mode,
some symbols are not available (such as Emoticons or
Smileys). In ?123 mode, you can only enter numbers
and symbols from the onscreen keyboard. The text
mode key shows .
To enter numbers:
1. Tap to enter the ?123 mode.
2. Tap the appropriate numeric key. (See “Selecting a
Text Input Mode With the Android Keyboard” on
page 42.)
To enter symbols:
1. Tap to enter the ?123 mode.
2. Tap the appropriate symbol key.
– or –
Tap to select from additional symbol
characters. The key shows when the
additional character set is active.
Entering Text Using Swype
Swype™ is a unique text input method that allows a
user to enter a word by sliding a finger from letter to
letter, lifting only between words. It uses error-correcting
algorithms and a language model to guess the word
intended. It also includes a tapping predictive text
system in the same interface.
DEL
DEL
ABC
?123
?123
ALT
ALT
SPH-D700.book Page 45 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
46 2A. Device Basics
The onscreen keyboard options are different between
the Android keyboard and Swype onscreen input
methods.
Enabling and Configuring Swype
The onscreen Android keyboard is the default
touchscreen input method on the Epic 4G. This
method of text input is similar to a normal keyboard.
Before you can select Swype as your text input
method, you must enable it in the Settings menu.
To enable Swype:
1. Press > and tap > Language &
keyboard.
2. Scroll down and tap Swype. A green checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled.
To configure Swype settings:
1. Press > and tap > Language &
keyboard.
2. Scroll down and tap Swype (Swype settings).
3. Scroll down the screen list of available options and
touch a corresponding entry to either activate or
configure the setting.
䡲Preferences allows configuration of the Swype text
input and feedback parameters.
●Language allows you to select the current text
input language. Default language is US
English.
●Auto-spacing automatically inserts spaces
between words. When you finish a word, just
lift your finger and start the next word.
●Auto-capitalization automatically capitalizes
the first letter of a sentence’s first word.
●Word Prediction uses a built-in word database
to predict your desired words while entering
text in Swype.
●Enable Tip Indicator turns on an onscreen
flashing indicator that provides helpful usage
information.
●Audio Feedback turns on/off sounds
generated by the Swype application during
use.
Note: Swype is the default input method.
SPH-D700.book Page 46 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 47
Device Basics
●Vibrate on keypress activates a vibratory
sensation as you enter text via the onscreen
keypad.
䡲Operation provides access to Swype operation
parameters.
●Display Trace sets the length of time the word
trace line remains onscreen as you swype
across the screen. Move the slider between
Shorter or Longer and touch OK.
●Word Choice Window sets the how often the
word choice selection window appears
onscreen. Move the slider between Never or
Always and touch OK.
●Speed vs. Accuracy sets how quickly Swype
responds to your onscreen input.
Do you prefer more accurate text entry or is
your desire for speed? Move the slider
between Fast Response (speed) or Error
Tolerant (accuracy) and touch OK.
●Auto-select word after sets the time period that
must pass before the first word is
automatically inserted. Move the slider
between 3 secs or 20 secs and touch OK.
䡲Help provides access to Swype help.
●Swype Help to access Swype Help information
and user manual.
●Tutorial provides access to onscreen Swype
Tutorials.
䡲About displays the software version of the current
Swype application.
Text Entry tips:
䢇To create double letter like pp in "apple," just do a
“squiggle” on the P key.
䢇To enter punctuation, touch and hold a key to view a
punctuation menu and make a selection.
䢇To enter contractions, move your finger over the
apostrophe.
䢇To correct a misspelled word, double-tap on the
word you want to change and then tap to erase
a single character. Touch and hold to erase an
entire word.
SPH-D700.book Page 47 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
48 2A. Device Basics
Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the
input field to reveal the onscreen keyboard.
2. With Swype as your text entry method, select one
of the following text mode options:
䡲123 ABC to use Swype with alphanumeric
characters from the onscreen keyboard.
䡲SYM (Symbol) to enter symbols from the onscreen
keyboard.
Swype Keyboard Overview
䢇Entry field: a field where text, number, or other
characters can be entered.
䢇Delete: deletes characters from the entry field.
Note: Some characters and types, such as some symbols
and emoticons, are not accessible from the onscreen
keyboard.
Tip: When entering text, tap to change letter
capitalization.
Important: Even if Swype is enabled from within the
Language & keyboard menu (page 46), Swype
must also be selected from within the Select Input
Method context menu (page 42).
Entry field
Delete
Caps/ALT
SWYPE mode
Text Input mode Speech to Text
Recipient
Send
SPH-D700.book Page 48 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 49
Device Basics
䢇CAPS/ALT: When in 123ABC mode, this key changes
the capitalization of the subsequent entered
characters. When in SYM mode, this key can show
additional symbol characters.
䢇Text Input mode: There are two available modes:
123ABC and SYM.
䡲123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters
and a few common punctuation marks. Text
mode button indicates .
䡲SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers.
Text mode button indicates .
䢇SWYPE tips ( ): Tapping this button displays the
Swype tips and tutorial screen.
123ABC Mode
In 123ABC mode, you can enter only letters and a few
common punctuation marks from the onscreen
keyboard. The text mode key shows .
1. Select the 123ABC mode (showing letters and
numbers on the onscreen keys).
䡲Capitalization in this mode can be altered by
using the Caps button.
next character is lowercase.
only the next character is uppercase.
all subsequent characters are uppercase.
2. Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to
form a word.
䡲If you make a mistake, tap to erase a single
character. Touch and hold to erase an entire
word.
By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and
the following letters are lower case. After a word is
entered and you lift your finger, the cursor automatically
adds a space after the word.
Entering Numbers and Symbols
By using the onscreen keyboard in Portrait mode,
some symbols are not available (such as Emoticons or
Smileys). In SYM mode using Swype, you can only
enter symbols and numbers from the onscreen
keyboard. The text mode key shows .
SYM
123
ABC
SYM
123
ABC
SPH-D700.book Page 49 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
50 2A. Device Basics
To enter numbers and symbols in Swype mode:
1. Tap to enter the SYM mode.
2. Touch the key for the number or symbol you
want to enter. To enter the alternate symbol on a
key, tap .
To enter text via Swype:
This example shows a user entering the word “there”.
Put your finger down on the “t”, and without lifting, glide
it to the “h”, and then to the “e”, and then over to the “r”,
and back to the “e”. When complete, lift your finger off
the screen to allow the device to determine the closest
word match.
1. Touch an onscreen
character, and then,
while maintaining your
finger onscreen, drag to
the next character in the
desired word.
2. Repeat this process until
the desired characters
have been drawn over.
䡲Select from an
onscreen list of possible
word matches (if
prompted).
䡲This occurs if your
current swype has
generated more than one possible word match.
For tips on using Swype, touch and follow the
onscreen information.
Note: If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry, an
onscreen popup appears to provide additional word
choices.
SYM
SPH-D700.book Page 50 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 51
Device Basics
Entering Text Using the QWERTY
Keyboard
Accessing the QWERTY Keyboard
The Epic 4G™ has a full, slide-out QWERTY keyboard.
The keyboard is located beneath the display screen
and is accessed by sliding it open. This orients the
device's display to Landscape (widescreen) mode.
With the QWERTY keyboard, you can type letters,
numbers, punctuation, and other special characters
into text entry fields or other applications as easily as
on your computer.
To open the device and access the keyboard:
1. Rotate the device 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
2. Slide the top section of the device up to open, as
shown in the illustration. When you slide the device
open, the display rotates from a vertical viewing
mode (Portrait) to a horizontal viewing mode
(Landscape).
To reveal additional QWERTY text editing options:
1. Touch and hold an active text entry field.
2. From the Edit text context menu, tap an available
function:
䡲Select all highlights all characters in the text
message field.
䡲Select text/Stop selecting text lets you manually
highlight characters in the text message field.
SPH-D700.book Page 51 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
52 2A. Device Basics
䡲Cut all cuts all characters in the current text
message field.
䡲Copy copies selected characters in the current
text message field.
䡲Copy all copies all characters in the current text
message field.
䡲Paste inserts the previously cut or copied text into
the message field.
䡲Input method provides additional text input
methods (Swype or Android keyboard). (When the
QWERTY keyboard is open, Swype and Android
Keyboard are disabled.)
Using the Keyboard
In this section we’ll cover the steps necessary to enter
text using the QWERTY keyboard. Using your device's
QWERTY keyboard is just like using any standard
computer keyboard.
The following keys perform special functions when
entering text:
FN: Allows you to use alternate characters
displayed at the top of the QWERTY keys.
Examples: $, @, #, !
Shift: Changes the text input mode
among Upper/Lower/Mixed case mode.
Smiley: Launches the Smileys page.
Scroll down and tap an entry from the
extensive list of emoticons.
Space: Inserts an empty space.
OK/Enter: Moves the insertion point to the
next line in a message.
Delete: Deletes the previous character,
similar to the backspace key on a
computer keyboard.
Menu: Allows you to access your device’s
main functions menu. Works in the same
manner as the device's main buttons.
Back: Returns you to the previous screen.
Works in the same manner as the
device's main buttons.
SPH-D700.book Page 52 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 53
Device Basics
Entering Letters
The first letter entered (of a field or new sentence) is
always an initial uppercase letter. By default, text is
entered in lowercase characters unless altered by
pressing .
To enter uppercase and lowercase characters:
1. Press to make the next character
uppercase. Characters revert back to lowercase
after the next character is typed.
– or –
Press twice to make all subsequent
characters uppercase (all new characters are in
uppercase).
䡲Pressing cycles through the capitalization
modes (all lowercase, initial uppercase, and all
uppercase).
2. Press the corresponding keys:
䡲For example, to enter the word “Bill” within a text
field, type the keypad sequence below.
䡲If you make a mistake, press to erase a
single character. Press and hold to erase all
previously entered text.
䡲To enter all uppercase characters, quickly press
twice.
Home: Returns you to the Home screen.
Works in the same manner as the
device’s main buttons.
Search: Displays the Quick Search box
that can be used to search for a key term
both on the device or online. Works in the
same manner as the device’s main
buttons.
B i l l
B I L L
SPH-D700.book Page 53 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
54 2A. Device Basics
Entering Numbers
䊳Press a number key on the top row of the
keyboard.
䡲If you make a mistake, press to erase a
single character. Press and hold to erase all
previously entered text.
䡲For example, to enter “9:30,” you would use the
keyboard sequence shown below.
Entering Symbols and Smileys
Most symbols and punctuation marks appear as
alternate characters above the primary letters and
numbers on the QWERTY keyboard. To access these
symbols, press and then press the appropriate
key.
Smileys (emoticons) are accessed by pressing
and then selecting an image from the Insert Smiley
page that is then inserted at your current cursor
position.
To enter symbols:
1. Position the cursor where you want the symbol to
appear within your message.
2. Press and then press the key
corresponding to the symbol you want to insert.
䡲For example, to enter “I’m #1,” you would use the
keyboard sequence shown below.
9 : 3 0
Tip: Certain additional symbols can be accessed by pressing
and touching the onscreen symbol.
I’m #1
SPH-D700.book Page 54 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2A. Device Basics 55
Device Basics
To enter “smileys” (emoticons):
1. Position the cursor where you want the emoticon to
appear within your message.
2. Press to open the onscreen smiley page.
3. Scroll through the list and select a smiley by
touching the onscreen icon.
Creating a Google Account
You will need a Google account to access several
device features such as Gmail, Google Maps, Google
Talk, and the Android Market applications. Before you
are able to access Google applications, you must enter
your account information. These applications sync
between your device and your online Google account.
1. From a computer, launch a Web browser and
navigate to www.google.com.
2. On the main page, click Sign-in > Create an
account now.
3. Follow the onscreen prompts to create your free
account.
4. Look for an email from Google in the email box
you provided, and respond to the email to confirm
and activate your new account.
Signing In to Your Google Account
1. Launch an application that requires a Google
account (such as Android Market or Gmail).
2. Click Next > Sign in.
3. Touch the Username and Password fields and
enter your information.
4. Tap Sign in. Your device communicates with the
Google servers to confirm your information.
5. If prompted, create a new Gmail username by
entering a prefix for your @gmail.com email
address.
For additional information about synchronizing
accounts, see “Synchronizing Accounts” on page 73.
Note: If you do not already have a Google account, touch
Create and follow the onscreen prompts to create your
new account.
SPH-D700.book Page 55 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
56 2B. Making and Answering Calls
⽧Making Calls (page 56)
⽧Dialing Options (page 57)
⽧Answering Calls (page 57)
⽧Missed Call Notification (page 58)
⽧Calling Emergency Numbers (page 59)
⽧In-Call Options (page 60)
⽧End-of-Call Options (page 61)
⽧Additional Calling Options (page 62)
⽧Saving a Phone Number (page 62)
⽧Finding a Phone Number (page 63)
⽧Dialing From the Contacts List (page 64)
⽧Speed Dialing (page 64)
⽧Plus (+) Code Dialing (page 65)
Making Calls
1. Press and then tap .
2. Enter a phone number using the onscreen keypad
and tap .
䡲If you make a mistake while dialing, touch
to erase the numbers.
䡲To make a call when you are roaming and Call
Guard is enabled, select OK and tap . (See
“Call Guard” on page 166.)
3. Tap when finished.
You can also place calls from your device by speed
dialing numbers from your Contacts (page 64) and
using your Call log listings (page 90).
2B. Making and Answering
Calls
Tip: To redial a recent number, press , tap a number from
the Call Log list, and press Call.
When making calls off the Nationwide Sprint Network,
always dial using 11 digits (1 + area code + phone
number).
End call
End call
SPH-D700.book Page 56 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2B. Making and Answering Calls 57
Calls
Dialing Options
When you enter numbers on
the Keypad, you will see three
onscreen options.
From the Keypad screen, you
have the following options:
䢇Call ( ) to call the
entered number.
䢇Delete ( ) to delete
digits from the current
number.
䢇Send message () to
send the current caller a text
message while still maintaining the current call
active.
To initiate additional options, tap and select an
option.
䢇Add to Contacts to add the current number to either a
new or existing Contacts entry.
䢇Speed dial setting to access the Speed Dialing menu
where you can assign a speed dial location to a
current Contacts entry. (See “Speed Dialing” on
page 64.)
䢇Add 2 sec pause: to insert a two-second pause to
enter a 2-second delay within a number string (the
phone continues dialing after 2 seconds without any
additional keys being pressed).
䢇Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number
string (the phone waits for your input). A wait requires
that any consecutive numbers be manually sent by
touching Yes.
Answering Calls
䊳Drag the incoming call notice up to . Other
options include:
䡲Ignore ( ) sends the call directly to your
voicemail box.
Note: All incoming call answering options listed below require
you to drag the incoming call notice to the option.
Answer
Answer
Ignore
Ignore
SPH-D700.book Page 57 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
58 2B. Making and Answering Calls
䡲Ignore with text ( ) sends the call to your
voicemail box and immediately allows you to
send the caller a text message.
Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer.
Your device notifies you of incoming calls in the
following ways:
䢇The device rings or vibrates.
䢇The backlight illuminates.
䢇The screen displays an incoming call message.
If the incoming call is from a number stored in your
Contacts, the entry’s name is displayed. You may also
see the caller’s phone number, if available.
Answering a Roam Call With Call Guard
Enabled
Call Guard is an option that helps you manage your
roaming charges when making or receiving calls while
outside the Nationwide Sprint Network. (Please see
“Roaming” on page 164 for more information.)
䊳Touch OK to answer the call. (See “Call Guard” on
page 166 for additional information.)
Ending a Call
䊳Tap .
Missed Call Notification
When you do not answer an incoming call, the Status
bar indicates .
To display a Missed Call entry from the Home screen:
1. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.
2. Tap the Missed call entry ( ). This opens the
Call log screen.
3. Tap an entry and select Call.
– or –
Touch and hold an entry from the Call log list and
from the context menu, select Call [number]. (See
“Using Context Menus” on page 39.)
Ignore with text
Ignore with text
Note: When your device is off, calls go directly to voicemail.
End call
End call
SPH-D700.book Page 58 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2B. Making and Answering Calls 59
Calls
Calling Emergency Numbers
You can place calls to 911 (from the Keypad, enter
), even if your device is
locked or your account is restricted.
During an emergency call, select an option.
䢇Speaker On to activate speakerphone mode. (If you
are in speakerphone mode, the option is displayed
as Speaker Off to deactivate.)
䢇Dialpad/Hide dialpad to show or hide the onscreen
dialpad.
䢇End call to end the current call.
To exit Emergency mode:
1. Tap to end a 911 call.
2. Touch and hold Exit on the Emergency Call Back
mode.
Enhanced 911 (E911) Information
This device features an embedded Global Positioning
System (GPS) chip necessary for utilizing E911
emergency location services where available.
When you place an emergency 911 call, the GPS
feature of your device seeks information to calculate
your approximate location.
Note: When you place an emergency call, your device
automatically enters Emergency mode.
End call
End call
Note: When you end the 911 call, you are returned to the
Emergency Call Back mode.
Within the Emergency Call Back mode, press the
Home key to use another menu.
Note: Depending on several variables, including availability
and access to satellite signals, it may take up to 30
seconds or more to determine and report your
approximate location.
Important: Always report your location to the 911 operator
when placing an emergency call. Some
designated emergency call takers, known as
Public Safety Answering Points (PSAPs) may not
be equipped to receive GPS location information
from your device.
SPH-D700.book Page 59 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
60 2B. Making and Answering Calls
In-Call Options
Once you initiate a call, you
will see six onscreen options.
Tap an option to select it.
䢇Add call touch and hold to
initiate a 3-way call
(page 163).
䢇Merge to join two currently
active calls (conference).
䢇Dialpad/Hide to toggle the
appearance of the onscreen
dialpad.
䢇End call to end the current
call.
䢇Speaker to route the device’s audio through the
speaker (On) or through the earpiece (Off).
䊳Activate Speaker to route the device’s audio
through the speaker. (You can adjust the speaker
volume using the volume buttons.)
䊳Deactivate Speaker to use the device’s earpiece.
䢇Mute to mute the microphone during an active call.
Tap again to unmute the microphone.
䢇Bluetooth to route the device’s audio through a
connected Bluetooth headset (On) or through the
speaker (Off). (See “2J. Bluetooth” on page 142.)
䡲When the call is routed to a Bluetooth headset,
the current call area shows the Bluetooth call
icon ( ).
●To route the current call back to the device,
tap Headset to temporarily use the device. Tap
it again to route the call back to the connected
Bluetooth headset.
䡲When Bluetooth or the Bluetooth headset is
turned off, the call is routed through either the
earpiece or speaker and shows ( ).
WARNING: Because of higher volume levels, do not place
the device near your ear during speakerphone
use.
Note: If Mute is activated, the speaker mode is deactivated.
Note: The Headset button is activated to show the current call
is routed to the connected Bluetooth headset.
SPH-D700.book Page 60 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2B. Making and Answering Calls 61
Calls
Touch Dialpad (l ) to use the onscreen dialpad to
enter additional numbers, for example, an extension or
access code.
䡲For example: When you call your bank’s 800
number, use your dialpad to enter your account
number and PIN.
Pressing during a call displays a list of available
in-call features. Tap an option to select it.
䢇Contacts to toggle the appearance of the onscreen
dialpad.
䢇Memo to create a new memo while remaining on the
call.
End-of-Call Options
After you receive a call from or make a call to a phone
number that is not in your Contacts, the device displays
the following options:
䢇Add to Contacts to add the current new number to
your Contacts. (See “Creating a New Contacts Entry”
on page 92.)
䢇Update existing to add the current number to an
existing Contacts entry. (See “Adding a Number to a
Contacts Entry” on page 100.)
䢇Call to redial the selected number and call back the
recipient.
䢇Message to send the selected number a text (SMS)
message.
Dialpad
Dialpad
Note: The End-of-Call options are not displayed for calls
identified as No ID, Restricted, or Unknown.
SPH-D700.book Page 61 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
62 2B. Making and Answering Calls
Additional Calling Options
To obtain additional options such as phone number
and the duration of the call, you must access the Call
log screen. (See “2D. Call Log” on page 87.)
1. Press and then tap > .
2. Tap an entry from the list and then tap:
䡲Call to dial the selected number and call the
recipient.
䡲Send message to send the selected number a text
message.
䡲Create contact to add the new number to your
Contacts. (See “Saving a Phone Number” on
page 62.)
䡲Send email to the entry an email using a
previously entered address.
䡲Update existing to add the current number to an
existing Contacts entry.
– or –
Tap an entry from the Call log list, and then press
and tap View contact, Delete, or Edit number
before call.
Saving a Phone Number
The number of Contacts entries you can store in your
device is limited only by available memory space. Your
device automatically sorts the Contacts entries
alphabetically. (For more information, see “2E.
Contacts” on page 92.)
To save a new number from the Home screen:
1. Tap > and enter a number.
2. Press and tap Add to Contacts.
– or –
Tap Add to Contacts (located just above the
dialpad).
Call log
Call log
Note: The End-of-Call options are not displayed for calls
identified as No ID, Restricted, or Unknown.
Keypad
Keypad
SPH-D700.book Page 62 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2B. Making and Answering Calls 63
Calls
3. Tap Create contact.
4. Tap a destination for your
new contact to be
synchronized. With each
new email account you
create, the list of options
grows.
䡲The new contact can be
easily synchronized to
either:
●Phone (locally stored
and are deleted when
phone resets).
●Google (Gmail account).
●Corporate (Outlook-Exchange Server).
5. Touch the First name and Last name fields and use
the onscreen or QWERTY keyboard to enter the
new contact name.
6. Touch Save to store and update the new entry.
Finding a Phone Number
You can search Contacts for entries by name.
1. Press and tap .
– or –
From the Keypad screen, tap .
2. Turn the device on its side and slide open the
QWERTY keyboard.
3. Enter the first letter or letters of an entry. (The more
letters you enter, the more specific the search.)
4. To display contact details, tap an entry from the list
green number field.
Note: You will not see the above option to select a destination
unless you have previously established a Google or
Corporate account on the device. (See “Synchronizing
Accounts” on page 73.)
Contacts
Contacts
SPH-D700.book Page 63 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
64 2B. Making and Answering Calls
Dialing From the Contacts List
1. Press and tap .
2. Scroll through the list and tap the entry you want to
call.
3. Tap a phone number.
Speed Dialing
Dialing From Favorites
You can quickly dial contacts you call frequently by
adding them to your Favorites list. Although not
assigned to a speed dial number, this is a quick and
easy way to dial your favorite Contacts. (See “Adding
Entries to Your Favorites” on page 102.)
To speed dial a contact from Favorites:
1. Press and tap > Favorites ().
2. Scroll through the list and tap the contact.
3. Tap Call to place a call or tap Message to send a
text to the contact.
Dialing a number from the Favorites tab is similar to
dialing one from the Contacts tab. (See “Dialing From
the Contacts List” on page 64.)
Assigning a Speed Dial Location
Only a Contacts entry can be assigned to an available
Speed Dial location.
Shortcut: From the Keypad screen, tap Contacts ( ) to list
entries.
Contacts
Contacts
Note: Eight speed dial locations are available.
Location 1 is reserved for your voicemail.
Favorites
Favorites
SPH-D700.book Page 64 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2B. Making and Answering Calls 65
Calls
To assign a Contacts entry to a Speed Dial location:
1. Press and tap .
– or –
Press and tap
> Contacts.
2. Press and touch
Speed dial.
3. Touch an empty speed dial
location (2-9).
4. Scroll through your
Contacts list and touch an
entry’s phone number.
Once complete, the entry’s
contact image and selected number are added to
the selected Speed Dial location.
To call a speed dial number:
1. Press and tap .
2. Press and hold a keypad number. The phone
number is then dialed.
– or –
1. Press and tap .
2. Press and touch Speed dial > [number]
(associated with the speed dial location).
3. Tap Call. The phone number is then dialed.
Plus (+) Code Dialing
When placing international calls, Plus Code Dialing
automatically enters the international access code for
your location (for example, 011 for international calls
made from the U.S.). (See “Activating Plus Code
Dialing” on page 77.)
1. Press and tap .
2. Touch and hold until you see a “+” on the
display screen. This is equivalent to manually
entering a “011” for international dialing.
3. Dial the country code and phone number, and
then tap . (The device automatically
prepends the access code for international dialing,
followed by the country code and phone number.)
SPH-D700.book Page 65 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
66 2C. Settings
⽧Sound Settings (page 66)
⽧Display Settings (page 69)
⽧Language Settings (page 72)
⽧Location Settings (page 72)
⽧Synchronizing Accounts (page 73)
⽧Search Settings (page 76)
⽧Call Settings (page 77)
⽧Airplane Mode (page 78)
⽧TTY Use With Sprint Service (page 78)
⽧Security Settings (page 80)
The Settings menu can be accessed by one of two
ways on the Epic 4G:
䊳Press > and tap .
– or –
Press and tap > .
Sound Settings
Ringer Types
Ringer types help you identify incoming calls and
messages. You can assign ringer types to individual
Contacts entries, types of calls, and types of messages.
Selecting Ringer Types for Voice Calls
Your device provides a variety of ringer options that
allow you to customize your ring and volume settings.
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display > Phone ringtone.
2. Tap a ringtone from the available list. The ringtone
briefly plays when selected.
3. Tap OK to assign a ringer.
2C. Settings
SPH-D700.book Page 66 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2C. Settings 67
Settings
Selecting Ringer Types for Notifications
The notification area displays icons associated with
user notifications such as email messages, missed
calls, voicemail, upcoming events, USB connections, or
Text/MMS messages. You can select the ringtone that
plays when your device receives new notifications.
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display > Notification ringtone.
2. Tap a notification ringtone from the available list.
The ringtone briefly plays when selected.
3. Tap OK to assign a ringer.
Activating Feature Sounds
You can select whether your device plays a sound
when using the dialpad, when making an onscreen
selection, and when an SD card notification occurs.
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display.
2. Tap a feature to enable it. (If a green checkmark
appears to the right of the feature, it is already
enabled.)
䡲Audible touch tones plays a tone while using the
dialpad.
䡲Audible selection plays a sound when making any
onscreen selection.
䡲Haptic feedback causes the device to vibrate
when pressing onscreen keys or with certain UI
interactions.
䡲SD card notifications plays a sound when an SD
card notification event occurs.
Adjusting the Volume Settings
Adjust the volume settings to suit your needs and your
environment.
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display.
2. Tap Ringer volume, Media volume or System volume.
3. Touch and drag the onscreen slider to adjust the
volume level, and tap OK.
䡲Within Ringer Volume, adjust the Incoming call
volume and Notification volume fields to assign the
volume settings.
SPH-D700.book Page 67 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
68 2C. Settings
Vibrate
To set your device to vibrate for incoming calls and silent
for notifications:
䊳Press the volume button down in standby mode
until you see on the screen.
To set your device to always vibrate for incoming calls:
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display.
2. Tap Phone vibrate. (If you have already checked the
option, tapping it again deselects the option.)
To set your device to vibrate while using the dialpad: and
making onscreen selections
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display.
2. Tap Haptic feedback. (If you have already checked
the option, tapping it again deselects the option.)
䡲This provides a physical feedback when
interacting with the onscreen options.
To set the vibration intensity on your device:
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display.
2. Tap Vibration intensity.
3. Touch and drag the onscreen slider to adjust the
intensity level, and tap OK.
Silence All
The Silence All option allows you to mute all sounds
without turning your device off (except for Media
volume).
To activate Silence All:
䊳Press and hold the volume button down in standby
mode until you see on the screen.
To deactivate Silence All:
䊳Press the volume button up repeatedly to select a
volume level.
Tip: You can adjust the ringer volume in standby mode (or
the earpiece volume during a call) by using the volume
button on the left side of your device.
SPH-D700.book Page 68 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2C. Settings 69
Settings
To set your device to silent mode:
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display.
2. Tap Silent mode. This option silences all audio on
the device except for media and alarms. (If you
have already checked the option, tapping it again
deselects this option.)
Display Settings
Changing the Screen Orientation
Although most screens will change orientation once
the QWERTY keyboard is opened, this feature can be
manually enabled to change the orientation for all
screens when rotation is detected. (See “Changing the
Screen Orientation” on page 36.)
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display.
2. Tap Orientation (enabled by default). A green
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.
䡲Clear the Orientation checkmark to disable this
automatic orientation adjustment.
Window Animation
This feature provides the use of animation when
onscreen windows are opened and closed. If
deactivated, windows pop on and off and no transitions
are applied.
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display.
2. Tap Animation and select No animation, Some
animations, or All animations.
Changing the Backlight Time Length
Select how long the display screen remains lit after you
press any key.
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display > Screen timeout.
2. Tap a time setting (15 seconds - 30 minutes).
Note: Long screen backlight settings reduce the battery’s talk
and standby times.
SPH-D700.book Page 69 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
70 2C. Settings
Changing the Keyboard Backlight Time
Length
Select how long the keyboard stays lit after you press
any key.
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display > Keyboard timeout.
2. Tap a time setting.
Changing the Brightness
Adjust your screen’s brightness to suit your
surroundings.
1. Press > and tap > Sound &
display.
2. Scroll down and tap Brightness.
3. Select the checkmark next to Automatic brightness
to allow the device to adjust brightness
automatically.
– or –
Clear the checkmark and then touch and drag
Brightness slider left or right to adjust the screen
contrast and tap OK.
Viewing Battery Use
Review which applications are draining your battery.
1. Press > and tap >
About phone > Battery use.
2. Tap an item to see more detailed information.
Changing the Display Screen
Choose what you see on the Home screen (behind
your shortcuts and Widgets) while powering on or off
the device, and when in standby mode.
Note: Long keyboard backlight settings reduce the battery’s
talk and standby times.
Note: Using animated Live Wallpapers can deplete your
battery faster than image wallpapers.
SPH-D700.book Page 70 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2C. Settings 71
Settings
1. Press > and tap (Wallpaper).
2. Tap Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpaper gallery.
䡲Gallery lets you choose from pictures taken using
the built-in camera or copied to your device as a
wallpaper. You can crop the picture before setting
it as a wallpaper. See “Assigning a Picture to an
Entry” on page 101 to learn how to crop the
picture.
䡲Live wallpapers provides a selection of preloaded
animated video wallpapers.
䡲Wallpaper gallery provides a selection of
preloaded wallpaper images.
3. Scroll through available images and tap a
selection to preview it.
4. Tap Set wallpaper to assign the new wallpaper.
– or –
Tap Save to assign a picture as a wallpaper.
Adjusting the Date and Time
Your device obtains its time and date information by
using the network-provided date, time, and time zone.
These values can be manually altered.
1. Press > and tap > Date & time.
2. Tap Automatic to disable the feature.
3. Tap Set date. Adjust the date, month, and year by
tapping or . Tap Set when finished.
4. Tap Select time zone, and then select a time zone
from the onscreen list. Scroll down the list to view
additional time zones.
5. Tap Set time. Adjust the hour and minute by
tapping or . Tap the am or pm icon to
change the value. Tap Set when finished.
6. Tap Use 24-hour format to toggle between using a
12-hour or a 24-hour format.
7. Tap Select date format to select how the date
information is displayed on your device. The
selected date format is also applied to the date
displayed within the device’s Alarm Clock.
Note: If enabled, you can not alter the date, time zone or time
values.
SPH-D700.book Page 71 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
72 2C. Settings
Language Settings
To assign the default language used by the Android
operating system.
1. Press > and tap > Language &
keyboard > Select locale.
2. Tap either English or Español. All menus are then
updated to the new language.
Location Settings
Your device is equipped with a Location feature for use
in connection with location-based services.
The Location feature allows the network to detect your
position. Turning Location off will hide your location
from everyone except 911.
To enable your device’s GPS Location feature:
1. Press > and tap >
Location & security.
2. Tap Use GPS satellites. A green checkmark
indicates the GPS location feature is enabled.
To enable Location via wireless networks:
1. Press > and tap >
Location & security.
2. Tap Use wireless networks. A green checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled.
䡲This service uses available wireless networks to
pinpoint your location within certain applications
such as Google Maps (page 211).
Note: Turning Location on will allow the network to detect
your position using GPS technology, making some
Sprint applications and services easier to use. Turning
Location off will disable the GPS location function for all
purposes except 911, but will not hide your general
location based on the cell site serving your call. No
application or service may use your location without
your request or permission. GPS-enhanced 911 is not
available in all areas.
SPH-D700.book Page 72 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2C. Settings 73
Settings
3. Tap Agree. Enabling this feature allows Google to
collect anonymous location data whether or not
any location application or other related feature is
active or in use.
䡲Tap Use wireless networks > disagree to disable
the collection of data. Enabling this feature can
utilize more resources and slow performance.
Synchronizing Accounts
Your device provides the ability to synchronize data
from a variety of different sources or sites. These
accounts can range from Google, a Corporate
Exchange Email Server, and other social sites such as
Facebook, Twitter, and MySpace.
Corporate and Google accounts provide the ability to
synchronize Calendar events and Contacts.
To enable the auto-sync feature:
1. Press > and tap >
Accounts & sync.
2. Tap Auto-sync. A green checkmark indicates the
feature is enabled.
䡲This feature enables the synchronization of data
between your device and external sites or servers.
䡲The two main components are Contacts and
Calendar Events. Before these can be
synchronized, they must be added to the
managed accounts list.
Synchronizing Your Google Account
By default, there are no accounts managed by the
device. These must be manually added.
To add manage an existing Google account:
1. Press > and tap >
Accounts & sync.
2. Tap Add account > Google.
Important: Any new email account should be managed and
synchronized via the Accounts & sync menu.
This process is not automatic for some accounts.
If a new email account does not appear in this
menu, it must be manually added and
synchronized.
SPH-D700.book Page 73 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
74 2C. Settings
3. Click Next > Sign in.
4. Touch the Username (@gmail.com) and Password
fields and enter your information.
5. Tap Sign in. Your device then communicates with
the Google servers to confirm your information.
Your existing Gmail account then appears within
the Managed accounts area of the screen.
䡲Any changes or updates to your Gmail account
are then automatically updated to your device.
To configure the Google management settings:
1. Press > and tap >
Accounts & sync.
2. Tap within the Google account field to reveal
the account’s synchronization settings screen.
3. Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize (Sync
Contacts, Sync Gmail, Sync Calendar). A green
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.
4. Press to return to the previous screen.
Synchronizing Your Corporate Account
By default, there are no Corporate Calendar events
managed by the device. These must be manually
added. (See “Synchronizing Corporate Calendar
Events” on page 106.)
To add a new Corporate account:
1. Press > and tap >
Accounts & sync.
2. Tap Add account > Corporate.
3. Follow the onscreen prompts to create your new
Corporate email account. (See “Corporate Email
(Outlook)” on page 190.)
䡲Any changes or updates to your Corporate/
Outlook account are then automatically updated
to your device.
Note: If you do not already have a Google account, touch
Create and follow the onscreen prompts to create your
new account.
Note: Once a corporate email account is created, it is
automatically added as a managed account.
SPH-D700.book Page 74 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2C. Settings 75
Settings
To configure the Corporate management settings:
1. Press > and tap >
Accounts & sync.
2. Tap within the Corporate account field to
reveal the account’s synchronization settings
screen.
3. Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize.
䡲Account settings allows you to configure:
●Account name displays the name used by the
device to track the account.
●Your name displays the name used in the
From field within your outgoing emails.
●Email check frequency configures the
frequency which the device queries the
remote server for new email changes. Choose
from: Automatic (Push), Never, Every 5 minutes,
Every 10 minutes, Every 15 minutes, Every 30
minutes, or Every hour.
●Amount to synchronize to assign the sync
range for your incoming and outgoing emails
between your device and your external
exchange server. Choose how many days
worth of emails should the device and server
synchronize. Choose from: One day, Three
days, One week, Two weeks, or One month.
●Default account assigns this account as the
default used when sending out new emails.
●Email notifications enables the device to
display a status bar icon when new
emails have been received.
●Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone
when a new or upcoming event is pending.
●Vibrate assigns a vibration when a new or
upcoming event is pending.
●Incoming settings provides access to the
Domain, password, and exchange server
parameter fields.
●Sync contacts synchronizes the contacts
between your device and the remote
exchange server. A green checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled.
SPH-D700.book Page 75 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
76 2C. Settings
●Sync calendar synchronizes your Exchange
calendar entries between your device and the
remote exchange server. A green checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled.
●Forward with files causes any outgoing email
reply to include any currently attached files. A
green checkmark indicates the feature is
enabled.
●Signature allows you to create an outgoing
email signature attached to new emails sent
from your device.
䡲Sync Contacts synchronizes the contacts between
your device and the remote exchange server. A
green checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.
4. Press to return to the previous screen.
For more detailed Work/Corporate email information,
see “Corporate Email (Outlook)” on page 190. For
more information on Corporate Calendar
synchronizing, see “Synchronizing Corporate Calendar
Events” on page 106.
Search Settings
You can use your device’s search preferences to
configure some aspects of Google Web search (for
example, whether it makes suggestions below the
Quick Search Box as you type), and what phone
features you want to include in searches.
Configuring the Search Settings
1. Press > and tap > Search.
2. Tap any of the following search parameters to then
alter the settings:
䡲Google search settings opens a screen where you
can set your Google search preferences.
●Show web suggestions also includes search
matches from Google’s online search engine.
●Search history determines whether you also
wish to included personalized search history
results in the list of matches.
●Manage search history helps to manage the
personalized search history associated with
your current registered Google account.
SPH-D700.book Page 76 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2C. Settings 77
Settings
䡲Searchable items opens a screen where you can
choose the search categories included in device
searches.
●Categories include: Contacts, Browser, Apps,
Music, YouTube or Voicemail.
䡲Clear search shortcuts erases the history of
recently selected search results.
Call Settings
Your device allows you to configure call settings such
as Plus Code dialing, other international dialing
options, and TTY configuration.
Activating Plus Code Dialing
Plus Code dialing allows you to have the phone
automatically dial the international access code for
your location once you touch and hold .
(See “Plus (+) Code Dialing” on page 65.)
1. Press > and tap > Call settings.
2. Tap North American dialing to activate the feature
(a green checkmark appears in the adjacent field).
Changing the International Dialing Code
By default, the international dialing prefix (code) is set
to 011. This code can not be changed until the feature
is temporarily disabled. Once disabled, the field
becomes accessible and can be altered.
1. Press > and tap > Call settings.
2. Tap North American dialing to deactivate the
feature. This enables the International Dialing field.
3. Tap International Dialing.
4. Tap the entry field and press from the
onscreen keyboard to delete the previous value.
– or –
Press and hold on the QWERTY keyboard to
delete the current prefix.
5. Enter a new value and tap OK.
6. Tap North American dialing to reactivate the feature.
This disables the International Dialing field.
DEL
SPH-D700.book Page 77 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
78 2C. Settings
Airplane Mode
Airplane Mode (Flight mode) allows you to use many of
your device’s features, such as Games, Memo, and
Music, when you are in an airplane or in any other area
where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited.
When you set your device to Airplane Mode, it cannot
send or receive any calls or access online information.
1. Press and hold to reveal the Phone
options.
2. Tap Flight mode (Flight mode is OFF).
– or –
1. Press > and tap > Wireless &
networks.
2. Tap Airplane mode to place a checkmark in the
adjacent field.
While in Airplane Mode, your device’s Status area will
display ( ).
To deactivate Airplane Mode:
1. Press and hold to reveal the Phone
options.
2. Tap Flight mode (Flight mode is ON).
– or –
3. Press > and tap > Wireless &
networks.
4. Tap Airplane mode to remove the checkmark.
TTY Use With Sprint Service
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a
telecommunications device that allows people who are
deaf, hard of hearing, or who have speech or language
disabilities, to communicate by telephone.
Your device is compatible with select TTY devices.
Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device
to ensure that it is compatible with digital cell phones.
Your device and TTY device will connect via a special
cable that plugs into your phone’s headset jack.
SPH-D700.book Page 78 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2C. Settings 79
Settings
If this cable was not provided with your TTY device,
contact your TTY device manufacturer to purchase the
connector cable.
To turn TTY Mode on or off:
1. Press > and tap > Call settings >
TTY. (You will see an informational message.)
2. Read the onscreen disclaimer and tap Yes.
3. Touch TTY Off to turn TTY mode off.
– or –
Touch any of the following to enable the feature:
䡲TTY HCO, TTY VCO, or TTY Full.
To access the state Telecommunications Relay Service
(TRS) for assistance with TTY calls:
䊳Dial to reach an
operator.
For additional information about Sprint Relay Services
and TTY compatibility, call Sprint Relay Customer
Service at 800-676-3777 or visit www.sprintrelay.com.
For additional technical support you may call
1-888-987-4357, or access the following website:
www.samsung.com/us/consumer/learningresources/
mobile/accessibility/pop_accessibility.html.
PQRS
Note: In TTY Mode, your device will display the TTY access
icon.
If TTY mode is enabled, the audio quality of non-TTY
devices connected to the headset jack may be
impaired.
WARNING: 911 Emergency Calling
Sprint recommends that TTY users make
emergency calls by other means, including
Telecommunications Relay Services (TRS),
analog cellular, and landline communications.
Wireless TTY calls to 911 may be corrupted
when received by public safety answering points
(PSAPs), rendering some communications
unintelligible. The problem encountered appears
related to software used by PSAPs. This matter
has been brought to the attention of the FCC,
and the wireless industry and the PSAP
community are currently working to resolve this.
SPH-D700.book Page 79 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
80 2C. Settings
Security Settings
Accessing the Security Menu
All of your device’s security settings are available
through the Security menu. You can secure your data
and limit phone access by requiring a screen unlock
pattern every time your device is turned on or every
time it wakes up from sleep mode (screen where the
screen turns off).
䊳Press > and tap >
Location & security.
Your Device’s Screen Lock Feature
Locking Your Device Screen
When your device is locked, you can only receive
incoming calls or make calls to 911.
䊳Press . Locking the screen prevents
accidental screen touches from activating phone
functions.
Unlocking Your Device Screen
1. Press to awaken the device.
2. Touch and drag the lock icon up or slide the
QWERTY keyboard out.
Your Device’s Unlock Pattern Feature
You can increase your device’s security by creating a
screen unlock pattern (disabled by default). When
enabled, you must draw the correct unlock pattern on
the screen to unlock and regain access to the device.
Creating an Unlock Pattern
1. Press > and tap >
Location & security.
2. Scroll down to the menu list and tap Set unlock
pattern.
3. Read the information on the screen, and then tap
Next.
SPH-D700.book Page 80 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2C. Settings 81
Settings
4. Review the onscreen
tutorial on pattern
creation, and then tap
Next.
5. Draw your pattern by
touching your first
onscreen point. Then,
without removing your
finger from the screen,
drag your finger over
adjacent points until
the gray trace line
overlaps each point
and they are
highlighted with a
green circle.
6. When you have connected at least four dots in a
vertical, horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your
finger from the screen.
7. Tap Continue to record the pattern.
8. Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then
tapping Confirm.
Once the feature is enabled, additional unlock pattern
options are then enabled from within the Security &
location menu list.
Configuring the Unlock Pattern Settings
To require the pattern for access:
1. Press > and tap >
Location & security.
2. Place a checkmark adjacent to the Require pattern
field.
To remove the visible unlock pattern from the Lock screen:
1. Press > and tap >
Location & security.
2. Remove the checkmark adjacent to the Use visible
pattern field.
䡲Removing this checkmark prevents the unlock
pattern from displaying on the unlock screen
when you draw it to unlock the screen.
Important: You must slide your finger on the screen to create
the pattern and not touch individual dots. If you
make a mistake or a point is not properly
selected, a red circle will appear.
SPH-D700.book Page 81 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
82 2C. Settings
What to do if you have forgotten your pattern:
If you fail to draw the correct unlock pattern on the
screen after five attempts, you are prompted to wait for
30 seconds before you can try again.
䊳If you have forgotten your screen unlock pattern,
tap Forgot pattern?.
䡲Sign in using your Google account name and
password, and create a new screen unlock
pattern before regaining access to the Home
screen.
Changing the Unlock Pattern
1. Press > and tap >
Location & security > Change unlock pattern.
2. Draw the current pattern on the screen.
3. Draw and repeat a new pattern. (See “Creating an
Unlock Pattern” on page 80.)
Calling in Lock Mode
When your device is locked, you can only receive
incoming calls or make calls to 911or Sprint Customer
Service.
1. Press to reveal the lock screen.
2. Tap Emergency call to reveal the Emergency
Keypad to place your emergency call.
䡲Draw your unlock pattern to regain access to the
full dialer and unlock the device.
Using Visible Passwords
When enabled, this feature allows you to view the text
being entered into a password field as you type it. So
many times there are other applications that insert an
asterisk (*) as you type. This can be confusing and can
cause issues. What if you mistyped the password or
used the wrong case? When enabled, you can see
what you are entering. This feature is enabled by
default.
Tip: You can also enable or disable tactile feedback
(vibration) for the unlock pattern with the Use tactile
feedback option.
Note: The Unlock Pattern applies if the Require Pattern
setting is enabled.
SPH-D700.book Page 82 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2C. Settings 83
Settings
To disable visible passwords:
1. Press > and tap >
Location & security.
2. Tap Visible passwords (to remove the checkmark
on the option).
Managing Your Available Memory
You can manage the information and configuration
related to both your microSD card and built-in device
storage memory.
To view your device’s total available memory:
1. Press > and tap >
SD card & phone storage.
2. Review the two memory sections for available
space information:
䡲External SD card displays the memory information
specific to an installed microSD card. This
amount of space can be altered by replacing the
current microSD card.
䡲Internal phone storage displays the memory
information specific to the built-in device memory.
This memory amount can not be altered because
it is part of the device hardware.
To view your microSD card storage information:
1. Press > and tap >
SD card & phone storage.
2. Locate the External SD card section.
3. Review the available fields:
䡲Total space indicates the total size of the currently
inserted microSD card. This includes both
available and used space information.
●To determine the amount of memory currently
used on the card, take the total space and
subtract the remaining available space.
䡲Available space indicates the amount of remaining
free memory space available on the microSD
card.
Note: Not all of the microSD card is registered in the available
space, as a small percentage of the storage is unread.
A 16GB microSD card will show approximately
14.73GB of total space.
SPH-D700.book Page 83 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
84 2C. Settings
䡲Unmount SD card allows you to “unmount” the
microSD card from its communication to the
device. This severs the connection so the card
can be safely removed or reformatted.
䡲Format SD card allows you to format (erase data
from) the microSD card. This can only be done
after a card that has been properly unmounted.
To view your device’s storage information:
1. Press > and tap >
SD card & phone storage.
2. Locate the Internal phone storage section indicating
the available storage space within the device’s
memory.
Manage Running Services
This service is an efficient method for managing power
consumption and processor/memory resources.
Processes can be stopped until the device is restarted.
To stop a currently running service:
1. Press > and tap >
Applications > Running services.
2. Tap an onscreen process entry.
3. Read the Stop service? dialog and touch Stop.
Using the Task Manager
Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over
time, and the biggest reason for this are background
applications. These are applications that were not
properly closed or shutdown and are still active but
minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you see
which of these applications are still active in the
background but also easily lets you choose which
applications are left running and which are closed.
To shutdown a current application:
1. Press and hold .
2. Tap Task Manager. This screen contains the
following tabs:
䡲Active applications display those currently active
applications running on your device.
Note: These stopped processes are restarted once the
device is restarted (power cycled).
Third-party Task Manager applications are also
available from the Google Marketplace.
SPH-D700.book Page 84 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2C. Settings 85
Settings
䡲Package displays any installed packages or
applications from the Market that are taking up
memory space. Tap Uninstall to remove them
from your device.
䡲Summary displays a visual graph indicating the
available and used space within the Random
Access Memory (RAM), Program, and External SD
card.
䡲Help provides additional battery saving
techniques.
3. From the Active applications tab, tap End to close
selected applications or tap End all to close all
background running applications.
Erasing Device Content
Use the Manage applications menu to quickly erase
selected content and uninstall third-party applications
stored in your device.
To clear an application’s cache:
1. Press > and tap >
Applications > Manage applications.
2. Press and tap Sort by size. This option sorts
the current Manage applications listing to display
those applications by amount of memory or cache
usage.
– or –
Press and tap Filter. This option sorts the
listed applications and processes based on one of
three available filters: All, Running, or Downloaded.
3. Tap the application whose cache you wish to
delete.
4. From the Application info screen, tap Clear data
and/or Clear defaults.
Note: Those applications with the largest usage appear at the
top of the sorted list. If not all applications or processes
are visible, select Filter > All.
SPH-D700.book Page 85 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
86 2C. Settings
To uninstall third-party applications:
1. Press > and tap >
Applications > Manage applications.
2. Tap the third-party application, and from the
Application info screen, tap Uninstall.
Resetting Your Device
Resetting the device restores all the factory defaults,
including the ringer types and display settings. All data,
including downloaded applications are deleted.
1. Press > and tap > Privacy >
Factory data reset. (You will see a disclaimer.)
2. Read the disclaimer and tap Reset phone.
3. If you are certain that you would like to restore all
factory settings, tap Erase everything.
Important: Only third-party applications can be uninstalled.
Applications preinstalled on the device can not be
removed.
Important: Back up your important data before you perform
a factory reset of the device.
SPH-D700.book Page 86 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2D. Call Log 87
Call Log
⽧Viewing Call Log (page 87)
⽧Call Log Options (page 88)
⽧Making a Call From Call Log (page 90)
⽧Saving a Number From Call Log (page 90)
⽧Altering a Number From Call Log (page 91)
⽧Erasing the Call Log (page 91)
Viewing Call Log
Call Log (History) is a list of the phone numbers (or
Contacts entries) for calls you placed, accepted, or
missed. Call log makes redialing a number fast and
easy. It is continually updated as your device
automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of
the list and removes the oldest entries from the bottom
of the list.
The Notification area of the Home screen (upper-left)
displays phone notifications, status, or alerts such as:
To access the Call log:
1. Press and tap > .
2. Tap an entry to view available options.
From within the Call log screen, each entry contains the
phone number (if it is available) and Contacts entry
name (if the number is in your Contacts).
2D. Call Log
Call in progress: Indicates there is
a call currently active and in
progress.
Missed Call: Indicates an incoming
call was missed.
Note: Call log records only calls that occur while the device is
turned on. If a call is received while your device is
turned off, it will not be included in history.
Call log
Call log
SPH-D700.book Page 87 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
88 2D. Call Log
Accessing Call Log From Notifications
You can also access the Call log from a Missed Call
notification. (See “Using the Notifications Panel” on
page 40.)
1. Locate from the Notifications area of the
Status bar.
2. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.
3. Tap the Missed call entry to open the Call log
screen.
Call Log Options
This list provides easy access to redial an entry, or you
can also choose to access two types of history entry
lists depending on how they are touched.
䢇Tap an entry from the list and tap Call to quickly
redial the selected entry. (See “Making a Call From
Call Log” on page 90.)
Dialed: Indicates all outgoing calls
made from your device.
Received: Indicates any received
calls that were answered.
Missed: Indicates any missed calls.
These are routed to your voicemail.
SPH-D700.book Page 88 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2D. Call Log 89
Call Log
䢇Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the
call options screen:
䡲Call allows you to redial the entry by name or
number.
䡲Send message allows you to create a new text
message to the selected entry.
䡲Send email allows you to create a new email that
is then addressed to the entry’s available email
address.
䡲Time provides the time and date of the call and its
duration.
䡲Create contact to save the number if it is not
already in your Contacts. (See “Saving a Number
From Call Log” on page 90.)
䡲Update existing to save the number to a pre-
existing Contacts entry.
䢇Touch and hold an entry to display the entry-specific
context menu:
䡲Call [Number] to redial the current phone number.
䡲Send message allows you to create a new text
message to the selected entry.
䡲Edit number before call to make alterations to the
current phone number prior to redial. (See
“Altering a Number From Call Log” on page 91.)
䡲Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not
already in your Contacts. (See “Saving a Number
From Call Log” on page 90.)
call options
entry-specific context menu
Call log screen
(tap)
(touch and hold)
SPH-D700.book Page 89 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
90 2D. Call Log
䡲View contact to view the information for the
currently stored Contacts entry.
䡲Remove to delete the entry from the Call Log list.
Making a Call From Call Log
1. Press and tap > .
2. Tap an entry, and then tap Call.
– or –
Touch and hold an entry name/number from the
list, and then tap Call [Number].
Saving a Number From Call Log
1. Tap a Call log entry > Create contact.
– or –
Touch and hold an entry > Add to Contacts.
– or –
Tap a Call log entry > Update existing to save the
number to an existing entry.
2. Tap a destination type
(Phone, Google, or
Corporate).
3. Tap the First name and
Last name fields and enter
a name for the contact.
4. Tap Save when you have
finished entering
information for the contact.
After you have saved the number, your device displays
the new Contacts entry in place of the previous
number. (See “Contacts Entry Options” on page 98.)
Note: You cannot make calls from the Call log to entries
identified as Unknown, No ID, Restricted or Private
Number.
Call log
Call log
Note: The option to select a destination is only available if you
have previously established a Google or Corporate
account on the device.
Note: You cannot save phone numbers already in your
Contacts or from calls identified as Unknown, No ID,
Restricted or Private Number.
SPH-D700.book Page 90 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2D. Call Log 91
Call Log
Altering a Number From Call Log
If you need to make a call from Call log and you need
to alter the number prior to dialing, you can add the
appropriate prefix by prepending the number.
1. Press and tap > .
2. Touch and hold an entry to access the
entry-specific options menu.
3. Tap Edit number before call.
4. Edit the number using the onscreen dialpad or
delete digits by pressing to erase the
numbers.
5. Tap once the number has been changed.
Erasing the Call Log
You can delete either an individual call log entry or all
current entries from the Call log list.
To clear a single entry from the Call log list:
1. Press and tap > .
2. Touch and hold an entry and tap Remove.
To clear all entries from the Call log list:
1. Press and tap > .
2. Press and touch Delete.
3. Tap Select all > Delete > Yes.
Note: To edit a number and save it to Contacts, tap View
contact in step 2 above, and then edit the number and
tap Save. (See “Editing a Contacts Entry” on page 99.)
Call log
Call log
Call log
Call log
Call log
Call log
SPH-D700.book Page 91 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
92 2E. Contacts
⽧Creating a New Contacts Entry (page 92)
⽧Saving a Phone Number (page 94)
⽧Confirming Contact Synchronization (page 94)
⽧Groups (page 96)
⽧Contacts Menu Options (page 97)
⽧Contacts Entry Options (page 98)
⽧Editing a Contacts Entry (page 99)
⽧Adding a Number to a Contacts Entry (page 100)
⽧Editing a Contacts Entry’s Number (page 100)
⽧Sending Contacts (page 101)
⽧Assigning a Picture to an Entry (page 101)
⽧Deleting Entries (page 102)
⽧Adding Entries to Your Favorites (page 102)
⽧Adding Facebook Content to your Contacts (page 102)
Creating a New Contacts Entry
If existing Google and
Corporate email accounts
have been synchronized to
your device, these will be
made available to your device
during the creation of new
entries. These new Contacts
entries can be assigned or
saved to synced accounts
such as Phone, Google, or Corporate.
Your device automatically sorts the Contacts entries
alphabetically. You can create either a Phone, Google or
Corporate contact.
2E. Contacts
Important: To verify your Contacts appear on your device,
you must sync your email accounts after setup
(Settings > Accounts & sync). (See “Confirming
Contact Synchronization” on page 94.)
Note: The option to select a destination is only available once
you have established a Google or Corporate account
on the device.
SPH-D700.book Page 92 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2E. Contacts 93
Contacts
䢇Phone contacts are stored locally on the device.
䢇Google contacts are shared with your existing
Google account and can also be imported to your
device after you have created a Google Mail account.
䢇Corporate (also known as Work or Outlook) contacts
are those contacts that are intended to be shared
with either an Exchange Server or from within
Microsoft® Outlook®.
1. Press and tap .
2. From the top of the screen, tap Create contact.
3. Tap a destination type (Phone, Google, or
Corporate).
4. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter
a name for the new entry.
5. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone
number field) to select a category such as: Mobile
(default), Home, Work, Work fax, Pager, Assistant, or
Other, or tap Custom.
6. Tap a phone number field and enter a phone
number.
䡲Tap Add phone number to enter additional phone
numbers for the new Contacts entry.
䡲Tap on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a
previously entered phone number.
7. Enter additional information such as: Email
addresses, IM chat addresses, Group assignment,
Ring tone, Company, Job Title or Add more fields to
input additional category information.
䡲Use your finger to slide the page up or down to
see additional fields and categories.
8. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
After saving the number, your device displays the new
entry within the Contact list. (See “Contacts Entry
Options” on page 98.)
WARNING: If the device is ever reset to its factory default
parameters, locally stored contacts can be lost.
Shortcut: Enter a phone number from the keypad and
press > Add to contacts > Create contact.
Proceed with steps 3–5.
Note: You will not see the option to select a destination unless
you have previously established a Google or Corporate
account on the device.
SPH-D700.book Page 93 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
94 2E. Contacts
Saving a Phone Number
To save a number from the keypad:
1. Press and tap .
2. Enter a phone number using either the onscreen
dialpad or QWERTY keyboard.
3. Tap Add to Contacts > Create contact or Update
existing.
– or –
Press and tap Add to Contacts > Create
contact or Update existing.
䡲If you're updating an existing contact, proceed to
step 6.
4. Tap a destination type (Phone, Google, or
Corporate).
5. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter
a name for the new entry.
6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone
number field) to select a category such as: Mobile
(default), Home, Work, Work fax, Pager, Assistant, or
Other, or tap Custom.
7. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
Confirming Contact
Synchronization
Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you
to add and manage a new or existing contact from
your online or remote accounts to your device. Prior to
syncing, you must first have an active Google or
Corporate account with current Contact entries, and be
signed into your account via the device.
Tip: ICE – In Case of Emergency
To make it easier for emergency personnel to identify
important contacts, you can list your local emergency
contacts under “ICE” in your device’s Contacts list. For
example, if your mother is your primary emergency
contact, list her as “ICE–Mom” in your Contacts. To list
more than one emergency contact, use “ICE1–___,”
“ICE2–___,” etc.
Note: You will not see the option to select a destination unless
you have previously established a Google or Corporate
account on the device.
SPH-D700.book Page 94 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2E. Contacts 95
Contacts
With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone
numbers, email addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated
and synced with your Epic 4G.
For more information about syncing existing managed
accounts, see “Synchronizing Accounts” on page 73.
1. Press > and tap >
Accounts & sync.
2. Locate the email account containing the contacts
you wish to synchronize.
3. Tap within the adjacent account field to
reveal the account’s synchronization settings
screen.
4. To synchronize Gmail Contacts, tap Sync Contacts.
A green checkmark indicates the feature is
enabled.
– or –
To synchronize Corporate Contacts, tap Sync
Contacts. A green checkmark indicates the feature
is enabled.
5. Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated
Contact information.
䡲This update process works both ways. For
example, any changes on the device are updated
to your Gmail Contacts list after sync.
Note: Any change on either side (Phone, Gmail, or
Corporate/Outlook Contacts), is reflected on the other
side after a sync process.
The process of updating your Contacts tab can take
several minutes. If after 10-20 minutes, your list has not
been updated, repeat step 2-3.
Note: Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your
Gmail and Corporate accounts via the device.
SPH-D700.book Page 95 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
96 2E. Contacts
Groups
This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact
to a call group. This group can be one of the already
present groups (Family, Friends, or Work) or a user-
created group.
To create a new group:
1. Press and tap > Groups.
2. If prompted, select a type (Phone, Google,
Corporate, etc.).
3. Press and tap Create.
4. Tap the Group field, and enter a name for the new
group.
5. Tap Ringtone and select a ringtone for the group.
6. Tap Save to store the newly created group.
To add an existing contact to a current group:
1. Press and tap > Groups > [type] (if
prompted) > [name of group].
2. Tap Add member.
Contacts tab Contact entry’s
Overview page
Contact Group Contact Details
SPH-D700.book Page 96 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2E. Contacts 97
Contacts
3. From the list of contacts, tap the contact(s) you
want to add or tap Select all. (A green check-mark
appears next to the selected entries.)
4. Tap Add to add the contact(s) to your group.
5. Touch an existing group.
To send a message to a group:
1. Press and tap
> Groups.
2. If prompted, select a type
(Phone, Google, Corporate,
etc.).
3. Tap an existing group, and
press > Send
message.
4. Select the recipients of the
new message (indicated
by a green checkmark).
5. Tap Send.
6. Type your message, and tap Send.
Contacts Menu Options
1. Press and tap .
2. Touch and hold an entry
and select from the
available contact menu
options:
䡲Edit to edit the currently
selected Contacts entry.
(See “Editing a Contacts
Entry” on page 99.)
䡲Delete to erase the
currently selected
Contacts entry. (See
“Deleting Entries” on
page 102.)
䡲Link contact to link the current contact to another
current contact. Similar to a “see also” feature. If
you can’t remember a contact’s information,
linking entries can help you find the person you
are looking for.
SPH-D700.book Page 97 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
98 2E. Contacts
䡲Mark as default to assign one the entry’s available
numbers as the default (main) contact number.
䡲Add to favorites to copy the current Contacts entry
to the list within the Favorites tab (page 102).
䡲Remove from favorites to remove the current
Contacts entry from the Favorites tab.
䡲Send namecard via to send the current Contact
entry’s information to an external recipient via
either Bluetooth, Email (Exchange or Internet), or
Gmail. (See “Sending Contacts via Bluetooth” on
page 146.)
䡲Add to group to add the Contact to a group
(page 96).
Contacts Entry Options
1. Press and tap .
2. Touch an entry to display
the Contact entry’s
overview screen. This
screen contains Name,
contact numbers, email,
and linked contact
information.
3. Press to reveal the
context menu specific to
this entry.
4. Tap an available option.
(See “Contacts Menu
Options” on page 97 for
descriptions.)
Note: Prior to using the Bluetooth feature, it must first be
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.
In addition to Contact’s information, other file types
(video, image, or audio) can be sent using Bluetooth.
Entry’s Overview screen
SPH-D700.book Page 98 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2E. Contacts 99
Contacts
Editing a Contacts Entry
1. From the Contact’s overview screen, press
and tap Edit.
2. Tap an option, such as First Name or Email
address, to begin editing.
䡲[image icon] to assign a picture to the entry. (See
“Assigning a Picture to an Entry” on page 101.)
䡲First name/Last name to edit the current name.
䡲Phone number to add or delete a phone number.
(See “Adding a Number to a Contacts Entry” on
page 100.)
䡲Email address to add or delete an email address.
䡲Google Talk to assign an existing Google IM client
contact name.
䡲Groups to edit the group association.
䡲Ringtone to assign a unique ringtone to the entry.
䡲Company to enter business information such as
company name.
䡲Job Title to enter the contact’s current business
job title/position.
䡲Nickname to enter a nickname for the contact.
䡲Address to enter a physical address for the
contact. Choose from Home, Work, Other, or
Custom.
䡲Note to add additional information for the contact.
䡲Add more fields to add additional categories such
as: Postal address, Web address, Birthday, and
Anniversary.
3. Tap Save to store your updates.
Note: When editing a Corporate contact entry, the following
category entries appear within the Add more fields
option: Nickname, Postal address, Web address,
Birthday, Anniversary, and Note.
Note: Some fields may appear in different order or within the
Add more fields menu.
SPH-D700.book Page 99 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
100 2E. Contacts
Adding a Number to a Contacts
Entry
1. From the Contact’s overview screen, press
and tap Edit.
2. From the phone numbers area, tap Add phone
number to create a new empty Phone number field
within the selected phone number category.
3. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone
number field) to select a category such as: Mobile
(default), Home, Work, Work fax, Pager, Assistant, or
Other, or tap Custom.
4. Tap the Phone number field to enter the new
number.
5. Tap Save to update the new number to the existing
Contacts entry.
Editing a Contacts Entry’s Number
1. From the Contact’s overview screen, press
and tap Edit.
2. Tap an existing phone number field.
3. Tap to clear one digit at a time.
4. Re-enter or edit the number using the onscreen
dialpad.
5. Tap Save to update the number to the existing
Contacts entry.
Note: Touch and hold the Phone number field to activate the
Edit text menu.
SPH-D700.book Page 100 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2E. Contacts 101
Contacts
Sending Contacts
1. Press and
tap .
2. Touch an entry to open
its overview page.
3. Press and tap
Send namecard via to
send the current Contact
entry’s information to an
external recipient via
either:
䡲Bluetooth to transmit this
contact to another
bluetooth-compatible
device.
䡲Email to attach the
contact card to a new
outgoing email
(Exchange or Internet).
䡲Gmail to attach the contact card to a new
outgoing Internet-based email.
Assigning a Picture to an Entry
Assign a picture to display each time a certain contact
calls you.
Assigning a picture via the device:
1. From the Contact’s overview screen, press
and tap Edit.
2. Tap a contact image (upper-left).
䡲Open an image location and tap an onscreen
image to prepare it for use.
●Press to return to the Select picture
page where you can now select the new
image.
3. Touch and drag along the sides of the yellow
border box to begin cropping the desired area,
and then tap Save to assign selected picture.
SPH-D700.book Page 101 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
102 2E. Contacts
Applying a picture to your Google Contact from within your
online Gmail:
1. Log into your Gmail account and go to your
Contacts page.
2. Select your Contacts entry (with a checkmark) and
click the image area (Change Picture).
3. Click Browse to locate a local copy of your image.
䡲You can also choose an image from other
sources such as Picasa® Web.
4. Crop the visible area of your selected picture and
click Apply Changes.
5. Sync your new contact from your online Gmail to
your device. See “Confirming Contact
Synchronization” on page 94.
Deleting Entries
1. From the Contact’s overview screen touch and
hold an entry from the list
2. From the Contacts Entry context menu, tap Delete.
3. Tap OK to confirm the deletion.
Adding Entries to Your Favorites
The Favorites tab is a listing that can help you quickly
access your most used or preferred Contacts entries.
1. Press and tap .
2. Touch and hold the entry name from the Contacts
tab listing.
3. From the Contacts Entry context menu, tap Add to
favorites.
Adding Facebook Content to your
Contacts
You can now add your Facebook contact information,
such as pictures, email, and phone numbers directly to
your Contacts list. All of their current contact
information is then migrated over to your phone.
Note: Another method to add or remove an entry from your
favorites is to toggle the state of the star icon on the
Contact’s details page (upper-right). Tap to add the
entry to your favorites (star is lit), tap again to remove.
SPH-D700.book Page 102 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2E. Contacts 103
Contacts
If a Contacts entry already exists in with a slightly
different name, separate entries are created and can
later be linked (joined) together into a single entry.
Log into Facebook
1. Press and tap > (Facebook).
2. Tap I agree to accept the terms of the End-User
License Agreement.
3. Enter your account’s access Email and Password
information. and tap Login.
4. Press and tap Home > Friends to confirm
your current friends list.
Adding Your Facebook Friends to Your
Contacts
Before you can add your friends, you must add your
Facebook account to the list of managed and
synchronized accounts. This process is similar to
synchronizing your email accounts.
This process not only synchronizes your contact
information but also your status, events, and more.
1. Press and tap .
2. From the Contact’s tab, press and tap Get
friends > Add account > Add account.
3. Tap Facebook from the Integrated contact accounts
section of the Add an account screen.
䡲This process adds your Facebook account to the
list of managed and synchronized accounts. In
this case for the purpose of maintain your
Facebook contacts synchronized with your
device’s Contacts list.
4. Tap Next and enter your account’s Email and
Password information.
5. Tap Log in to begin the synchronization process.
6. Select a sync interval (from 1 hour to Once a day)
and tap Next.
7. Tap those setting you wish to synchronize (all are
enabled by default). A green checkmark indicates
the feature is enabled.
Note: You must first have an active Facebook page
populated with friends sharing their contact information.
SPH-D700.book Page 103 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
104 2E. Contacts
䡲Choose from: Sync Contacts, Add all friends, or
Sync Calendar.
8. Tap Done to save these settings and return to
Accounts and sync screen.
9. Press and tap to confirm your
Facebook contacts are new synchronized and
appear in your Contacts list.
Linking Multiple Contact Entries
Linking similar contact entries allows you consolidate
listed entries. Multiple entries such as: Alex Home, Alex
At Work, Alex S., can be consolidated or joined into a
Single Alex entry listing.
When synchronizing Facebook friends to your existing
Contacts list, some friend names may not match your
current list names.
1. Press and tap .
2. Tap an entry from the list you wish to use as your
main source of contact information. This
“duplicate” entry will be used as your primary
Contacts entry. Its Contact image, phone and email
address will be used as the primary for this
contact.
3. From the Contact entry’s overview screen,
press and tap Link contact > Show all
contacts.
4. Tap the duplicate Contacts entry.
䡲This duplicate entry is then merged into the
previous entry. The previous image, email, phone
numbers, are kept as the primary and
supplemented by your newly “joined” entry.
Note: If friends do not have a posted phone number, then
only their email address will be added.
Note: In the case of Facebook contacts, if you prefer to use
their image, phone, email, and other personal
information as your main source for the selected
contact, its is recommended that you select this
Facebook contact as your main Contacts entry in
step 2.
SPH-D700.book Page 104 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2E. Contacts 105
Contacts
Unlinking Contacts
1. Press and tap .
2. Tap an entry from the Contacts list.
3. From the Contact entry’s overview screen,
press and tap the linked Contacts area.
4. Tap to remove a selected contact source
from the current entry. The removed entry then
re-appears within the Contacts list.
Note: The number of linked contacts appear within the
Linked Contacts area, ex: 2 linked contacts. The source
of those contacts are also shown (ex: Google,
Facebook, etc..)
SPH-D700.book Page 105 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
106 2F. Calendar & Tools
⽧Before You Begin (page 106)
⽧Calendar (page 106)
⽧My Files (page 112)
⽧Memo (page 113)
⽧Alarm Clock (page 113)
⽧Calculator (page 115)
⽧Updating Your Device Firmware (page 115)
⽧Updating Your Android Operating System (page 117)
⽧Updating Your Profile (page 118)
⽧Updating Your PRL (page 118)
Before You Begin
Prior to using Google applications such as Gmail and
calendar, you will need to have an active Google
account (page 55).
Google Calendar is an application that synchronizes
new and existing entries between your device and your
online Google account.
Calendar
Synchronizing Corporate Calendar Events
Corporate calendars are not synchronized to your
device by default; this account type must be manually
added. Although we previously described how to add a
corporate account to your list of managed accounts,
this only allows your device to track that account type’s
email.
Calendar events must be added and tracked by your
device separately.
To add corporate calendar events to your device’s
managed account tracking:
1. Press > and tap >
Accounts & sync.
2F. Calendar & Tools
SPH-D700.book Page 106 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2F. Calendar & Tools 107
Calendar / Tools
2. Locate the corporate email account within the
Managed accounts area of the screen.
䡲If not present, you will have to add this account
(page 74).
3. Tap within the Corporate account field to
reveal the account’s synchronization settings
screen.
4. Tap Sync Calendar to activate the synchronization
of calendar events between your device and the
remote exchange server. A green checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled.
To manually sync your calendar events to a managed
corporate account:
1. Press > and tap >
Accounts & sync.
2. Tap within the Corporate account field.
3. Tap the green checkmark to toggle it off then back
on. (See “Synchronizing Your Corporate Account”
on page 74.)
Configuring Calendar Settings
1. Press and tap (Calendar).
2. Tap > Settings.
3. Tap an onscreen option:
䡲Calendars displays the currently managed
accounts. Tap an entry to change the sync state
of the account.
䡲Calendar sync provides access to the sync
settings screen where you can enable/disable the
sync status of your managed accounts and add
more accounts.
䡲Default view configures the current Calendar
default view for events. Month view is the default.
Choose from: Month, Week, Day or List.
䡲Day views configures how the available events are
displayed onscreen. Choose from Time grid or
Event list.
䡲First day of week sets the calendar week to start
with either Sunday or Monday.
䡲Hide declined events hides (checked) or displays
(unchecked) those events that have been
declined via the calendar application.
Note: It might be necessary to toggle the feature on and off to
force a re-sync.
JANUARY
SPH-D700.book Page 107 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
108 2F. Calendar & Tools
Adding an Event to the Calendar
Your Calendar helps you organize your time and
reminds you of important events.
1. Press and tap (Calendar).
2. Tap a day to which you would like to add an event
and press and tap Create.
䡲The default view for the Calendar is the Month
view.
䡲To change the view, tap the available tabs along
the top (in portrait view) or the left (in landscape
view) of the Calendar screen. Choose from Month,
Week, Day, and List.
3. Tap the Event field and enter a title for the event.
4. Select a From/To date for the event by tapping the
corresponding fields, and adjusting the month, day,
and year by tapping or .
䡲Tap Set when finished.
5. Select a time for the event by tapping the time field
and then adjusting the hour and minute by tapping
or .
䡲Tap the AM or PM button to change the value.
䡲Tap Set when finished.
6. Tap the All day field to assign this as an all day
event. If assigned as an all day event, the time
fields are removed as options.
Note: To synchronize calendar events among your Google
and Corporate accounts, make sure they are being
managed by your device (page 73).
JANUARY
Calendar Menu Options
Views
SPH-D700.book Page 108 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2F. Calendar & Tools 109
Calendar / Tools
7. Assign the new calendar event to a current
account by tapping the Calendar field and then
selecting an account. For this example we are
choosing a Google account.
䡲My calendar are calendar entries that are stored
locally on the device and not part of an email
account.
䡲Google/Gmail are calendar entries that are
synchronized between your device and your
online Google account.
䡲Corporate are calendar entries that are
synchronized between your device and either an
Exchange Server or available from within
Microsoft® Outlook®.
䡲Important are calendar entries that are
synchronized between your device and assigned
to an important category.
䡲default calendar are calendar entries that are
synchronized between your device and your
default email account.
䡲Tap OK when finished.
8. Enter a location for the event in the Location field.
9. Assign participants by either entering an email
address directly into the participants field or
selecting from one of the four available sources:
䡲Contact allows you to choose participants from
your current pool of available contacts (local and
managed accounts). Tap entries and tap Add.
䡲Group allows you to choose participants by
selecting the main group categories. Participants
assigned to those groups are then automatically
added and notified of your new event. Tap entries
and tap Add.
䡲Search allows you to search for recipients from
within your available email contacts of the
currently assigned email account
(step 7). Tap entries and tap Add.
Note: Some of the previous options appear when compatible
email accounts (such as Outlook) have been created
and synced. If also supported, additional categories
appear: Business, Red Category+, Important, and
Personal.
SPH-D700.book Page 109 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
110 2F. Calendar & Tools
䡲Recently allows you to select from recent email
recipients. Tap entries and tap Add.
10. Select an alarm time by tapping the Alarm field.
䡲Select None, On time, 5 mins before, 15 mins
before, 1 hour before, 1 day before, 2 days before,
1 week before, or Customize.
䡲Customize allows you to manually enter a desired
number. Tap Set to complete the custom
assignment.
11. Select a recurrence cycle for the event by tapping
the Repeat field.
䡲Select One-time event, Daily, Every weekday
(Mon-Fri), Weekly (every [day]), Monthly (every
[Number Day]), Monthly (on day [Number]), and
Yearly (on [Month Day]).
12. Enter a description for the event in the Description
field.
13. Tap Save to store the new event and synchronize it
with your selected account.
Event Reminders
When your device is turned on and you have an event
alarm scheduled, there are several ways your device
alerts you to scheduled events:
䢇By playing a short beep.
䢇By illuminating the backlight.
䢇By indicating a icon within the Status bar.
To view additional options:
1. Tap the Status bar, and then slide your finger down
the screen to open the Notifications panel.
2. Tap the upcoming event name from the onscreen
list to display the event within the Calendar
notifications screen.
3. Tap an option.
䡲Snooze all to snooze all event reminders for five
minutes.
䡲Dismiss all to dismiss all event reminders.
Note: The Search option appears when the calendar type is
set to Corporate.
Note: When you add participants to a Calendar event, an
email invitation is sent to the participants' email when
the event it saved.
SPH-D700.book Page 110 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2F. Calendar & Tools 111
Calendar / Tools
䡲Press to keep these reminders in place
and close the Notifications panel.
Viewing Events
1. Press and tap . Once an event has
been created, entries are shown in the default view.
2. To view a Calendar event farther out, tap either
Week or Month.
3. Tap the day for which you would like to view
events. (Your device lists events in chronological
order.)
4. To display an event’s details, tap it from the current
screen.
Going to the Current Day’s Calendar Menu
䊳From Calendar view, press and tap Today.
Editing an Existing Event
1. Press and tap .
2. Tap an event to reveal its details.
3. Press and tap Edit.
4. Make your modifications (event name, location,
participants, alarm, repetition, etc).
5. Tap Save to store the new updates and
synchronize them with your assigned account.
Erasing a Day’s Events
1. Press and tap .
2. Tap the Day tab on the Calendar screen.
3. Press and tap Delete.
4. Tap Select all to delete all events on this day.
– or –
Place a checkmark only on those events you want
deleted.
5. Tap Delete to erase the selected events and then
synchronize this action with your managed
account.
Note: If in the Month view (tab), days containing calendar
events are indicated by a blue triangle. Tap a day from
this view to display a list of event within the Day tab.
JANUARY
JANUARY
JANUARY
SPH-D700.book Page 111 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
112 2F. Calendar & Tools
Erasing All Events
1. Press and tap .
2. From the main Calendar screen (Month tab view),
press and tap Delete.
3. Tap Select all to delete all events currently available
for this managed account.
– or –
Place a checkmark only on those events you want
deleted.
4. Tap Delete to erase the selected events and then
synchronize this action with your managed
account.
My Files
My Files allows you to view a list from which you can
launch a file if the associated application is already on
your device (ex: MP4 and DivX).
Accessing File Viewer
䊳Press and tap > (My Files).
Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy
structure with folders, subfolders, etc.
Opening Files in File Viewer
1. Press and tap > (My Files).
2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate
your selected file.
䡲Tap the Up tab to back up into a higher directory.
䡲Tap the Home tab to back up to the root directory.
䡲Press and tap the View by to change the
way the files are displayed onscreen. Choose
from: List, List and details, or Thumbnail.
●Press for these additional options:
Share, Create folder, Delete, View by, List by,
and More (Move, Copy, Rename, and Settings).
3. Once you have located your file, tap the file name
to launch the associated application.
Note: The best recoding setting for MP4 video playback on
this device is H.264 for Android™ or PSP™.
JANUARY
SPH-D700.book Page 112 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2F. Calendar & Tools 113
Calendar / Tools
Memo
Your device comes with a memo application that you
can use to compose and store reminders and notes to
help keep you organized.
To compose a memo:
1. Press and tap > (Memo).
2. Tap the onscreen text field and enter your desired
text using either the QWERTY keyboard or
onscreen keyboard.
3. Adjust the paper color by tapping one of the five
available colors.
4. Tap Save to store the new memo.
Alarm Clock
Your device comes with a built-in alarm clock that has
multiple alarm capabilities. There is no limit to the
number of alarm events you can create.
1. Press and tap > (Alarm Clock).
2. To activate an alarm, tap the checkmark to the
right of the alarm.
3. To edit an alarm, tap the entry and then tap the
Time field to adjust the alarm time.
䡲Adjust the hour and minute by tapping either
or .
䡲Tap the AM or PM button to change the value.
䡲Tap Set when finished.
Note: If there is already a previously stored memo on the
device, touch the Create memo button to create a new
memo.
Note: Upon your first launch of the Alarm Clock application,
three alarm presets are set up by default and ready for
you to customize. These alarms are turned off by
default.
Note: A new alarm can also be created from the Alarm page
by pressing > Add alarm.
SPH-D700.book Page 113 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
114 2F. Calendar & Tools
4. Tap Ringtone to select an audio ringtone that will
sound with the alarm.
䡲Tap a ringtone to hear an audio sample.
䡲Tap OK to accept the ringtone assignment.
5. Tap Vibrate to add a vibration feature to the alarm.
6. Tap the Repeat field to select a repeating status for
the alarm.
䡲Place a checkmark adjacent to the desired
repetition days Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,
Thursday, Friday, Saturday or Sunday and tap OK.
7. Select a unique name for this alarm event by
tapping the Label field, entering a new label, and
tapping OK.
8. Tap Done to store the new alarm event.
To delete an Alarm event:
1. Press and tap > .
2. Touch and hold a desired alarm event, tap Delete
alarm, and then tap OK.
To disable an Alarm event:
1. Press and tap > .
2. Touch and hold a desired alarm event and tap
Disable alarm.
– or –
Tap the green checkmark next to an active alarm
to cancel it.
To customize the onscreen clock:
1. Press and tap > .
2. Tap the onscreen alarm clock (top of Alarm Clock
screen).
3. Scroll your finger across the bottom field to
temporarily view each selection.
4. Tap the desired image to activate the new clock
face.
Note: The number of hours and minutes left before the alarm
goes off is briefly displayed onscreen after you set the
new alarm time.
Note: To allow the alarm to sound even while the device is in
silent mode, press and tap Settings, and then
activate the Alarm in silent mode field.
SPH-D700.book Page 114 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2F. Calendar & Tools 115
Calendar / Tools
To hide the onscreen clock:
1. Press and tap > .
2. Press and tap Hide clock.
Calculator
Your device comes with a built-in calculator.
1. Press and tap > (Calculator).
2. Enter numbers using your keyboard or by tapping
an onscreen key.
3. Press and hold on the QWERTY keyboard to
clear all numbers.
– or –
Touch and hold to clear all numbers.
䡲Tap C (CLEAR) to clear all numbers.
䡲Orient the device into Landscape mode to view
and use the Advanced panel (left) to access more
advanced features such as sin (Sine), cos
(Cosine), and tan (Tangent), indicated by blue
onscreen buttons.
Updating Your Device Firmware
You can update your device's software using the
Update Firmware option.
Before Updating Your Firmware
Updating your device firmware will erase all user data
from your device. You must back up all critical
information before updating your device firmware.
Back Up All Data Prior to Update
To back up your Gmail information:
1. Press > and tap > Accounts &
sync. (See “Synchronizing Accounts” on page 73.)
2. Tap the Auto-sync option to enable the feature
(checkmark). (See “Configuring Data
Synchronization Settings” on page 195.)
Note: These advanced panel features are also available
when the keyboard is opened in Landscape mode.
SPH-D700.book Page 115 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
116 2F. Calendar & Tools
䡲If the Auto-sync option is on, email, Calendar and
Contacts automatically synchronize whenever a
change is made.
䡲If the Auto-sync option is off, simply tap
within the account field to reveal the account’s
synchronization settings screen.
To back up your Exchange Mail information:
1. Press > and tap >
Accounts & sync. (See “Corporate Email (Outlook)”
on page 190 and “Synchronizing Accounts” on
page 73.)
2. Tap within the Corporate account field to
reveal the account’s synchronization settings
screen.
3. Toggle the onscreen checkmark to manually
synchronize the desired parameters (Contacts or
Calendar).
To back up stored text messages:
1. Press and tap .
2. Select the text message from the list to view the
message thread.
3. Touch and hold on a text message from the string
Message Options context menu appears.
4. Tap Forward and enter a recipient’s phone number.
To back up your Google applications:
Your Google™ application purchases are reloaded
remotely and can be re-installed after the update is
applied. (See “Using the Android Market” on
page 196.)
1. Log into your Google account via the device.
2. Press and tap .
3. Press and tap Downloads.
4. Scroll through the list of previously downloaded
Google applications and choose the one you wish
to reinstall.
5. Follow the onscreen instructions.
As an added precaution, to preserve any data on your
microSD card, please remove it from your device prior
to starting the update process. (See “Removing the
microSD Card” on page 123.)
SPH-D700.book Page 116 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2F. Calendar & Tools 117
Calendar / Tools
Updating Your Device Firmware
Once you have backed up all your data, use the
Update Firmware option to update your device
firmware.
1. Press > and tap >
About phone > System Updates.
2. Tap Update Firmware. (Your device automatically
downloads and installs any available updates. You
may be required to power your device off and
back on to complete the software upgrade.)
– or –
1. Locate the System Update Available icon ( ) in
Notifications.
2. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.
3. Tap to open the System Updates screen.
4. Tap Download and follow the onscreen
instructions. ( appears within the Status bar to
indicate the device is downloading the necessary
files.)
5. Touch Restart & install to complete the process.
Confirm Your Current Device Firmware
1. Press > and tap > About phone.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the page and locate the
Baseband version read-only field.
Updating Your Android Operating
System
This option allows you to update the Android Operating
System (OS) on your device via an over-the-air
connection.
1. Press > and tap >
About phone > System Updates > Update Android.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions.
– or –
Note: The Notifications panel can also be opened on the
Home screen by pressing and then tapping
Notifications.
SPH-D700.book Page 117 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
118 2F. Calendar & Tools
1. Locate the Android OS Update Available icon
( ) in Notifications.
2. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.
3. Tap the Android update available field.
4. Tap Download and follow the onscreen
instructions.
Updating Your Profile
This option allows you to automatically update your
online user profile information. If you choose to change
your user name and select a new one online, you must
then update the user name on your device.
1. Press > and tap >
About phone > System Updates > Update Profile.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Updating Your PRL
This option allows you to download and update the
PRL (preferred roaming list) automatically.
1. Press > and tap >
About phone > System Updates > Update PRL.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Note: If your data services or account syncing ever seems to
go out unexpectedly, use this feature to reconnect with
the network.
SPH-D700.book Page 118 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2G. Voice Services 119
Voice Services
⽧Voice Dialing (page 119)
⽧Opening Menus With Voice Dialer (page 121)
⽧Text-to-Speech (page 121)
⽧Voice Search (page 122)
Voice Dialing
You can use your device’s built-in automatic speech
recognition (ASR) software, called Voice Dialer, to dial a
phone number in your Contacts or to launch phone
functions. All you have to do is to talk into the phone,
and ASR will recognize your voice and complete tasks
by itself.
Activating Voice Dialer
䊳Press and tap > (Voice Dialer).
The screen displays
“Listening” and the phone
prompts you to say the name
of the command you want to
use. To complete your task,
simply follow the voice
prompts or touch an
onscreen option.
Available ASR commands
include:
䢇Call <Name> to call an
entry in your Contacts list.
(See “Calling a Contact
With Voice Dialer” on
page 120.)
䢇Dial <Number> to call a
spoken phone number.
䢇Redial to redial the last number dialed.
Important: The Voice Control (Speech to Action) feature will
not launch if you are currently in an active menu.
2G. Voice Services
SPH-D700.book Page 119 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
120 2G. Voice Services
䢇Open <Menu> to jump directly to menu items or
applications. (See “Opening Menus With Voice
Dialer” on page 121.)
Calling a Contact With Voice Dialer
1. Press and tap > (Voice Dialer).
2. When you see “Listening,” say “Call” followed by
the name and the label for the contact you wish to
call. For example, say “Call John Smith Mobile.” The
device dials the number stored for the contact
“John Smith” with the label “Mobile.”
䡲If the location is not recognized or the name does
not have a phone number stored in Contacts, you
will see an onscreen list of possible options.
䡲If a name has only a single number, or if you
know the name but are not sure which number to
call, say “Call” followed by the name only. For
example, say “Call John.”
●If the name is recognized and there is only
one phone number for the name, your device
immediately places the call.
●If there are multiple numbers, you will see a
list; tap a number to place the call.
Calling a Phone Number With Voice Dialer
1. Press and tap > (Voice Dialer).
2. When you see “Listening,” say “Call” followed
immediately by a valid string of digits to be dialed,
for example, say “Call 555 555 5555.”
Speak naturally and clearly and remember to speak
one digit at a time—1-800 should be pronounced “One
Eight Zero Zero.”
Tip: Use Voice Dialer in a quiet environment so it can
accurately recognize your commands.
SPH-D700.book Page 120 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2G. Voice Services 121
Voice Services
Opening Menus With Voice Dialer
You can jump directly to many menu items or
applications by saying “Go to” followed by a menu
option.
1. Press and tap > (Voice Dialer).
2. When you see
“Listening,” say “Open.”
A list of valid actions is
displayed.
3. Tap an option to open
the selected menu.
Text-to-Speech
Allows the device to provide a verbal readout of
onscreen data such as messages and incoming caller
information (based on Caller ID).
Text-to-Speech Settings
1. Press > and tap >
Text-to-speech.
2. Configure the available options to alter the settings
associated with this feature.
䡲Listen to an example plays a short example of
what the text-to-speech feature will sound like on
your device when activated.
䡲Install voice data confirms the installation of
necessary data required for voice synthesis. Tap
this to download and install the free app from
Android market.
Tip: You can also say
"Open" and the name of
the item you want to
open. You will see the
item displayed. Tap OK
to open it.
Important: Before initial use, activate the Install voice data
function to properly activate and use the
text-to-speech functionality.
SPH-D700.book Page 121 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
122 2G. Voice Services
䡲Always use my settings overrides any conflicting
application settings with those you set up within
this text-to-speech settings screen. If enabled, and
available as a feature, your device will default to
using the text-to-speech feature.
䡲Speak incoming CallerID enables the device to
verbally read out incoming Caller ID information
for known and current Contacts.
䡲Speech rate adjusts the rate at which onscreen
text is spoken by the device. Choose from: Very
slow, Slow, Normal, Fast, and Very fast.
䡲Language assigns the language used by the
verbal readout. Choose from American English or
Spanish.
3. Press to return to the previous screen.
To enable verbal readout of an incoming call:
1. Press > and tap >
Text-to-speech.
2. Tap Speak incoming CallerID (to place a checkmark
on the option). Callers who are already in your
Contacts list will be verbally announced.
Voice Search
Voice Search works similarly to the Voice Dialer. It uses
built-in voice recognition software to listen to your
spoken words, convert those to text, and then launch a
Google search using that text.
1. Press and tap > (Voice Search).
2. Speak clearly into the microphone. If an error
occurs, tap Try again.
3. From the onscreen Google search page, tap a
matching entry.
SPH-D700.book Page 122 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2H. microSD Card 123
microSD Card
⽧Your Device’s microSD Card and Adapter (page 123)
⽧Connecting Your Device to Your Computer (page 125)
⽧microSD Card Settings (page 128)
⽧Important Connection Information (page 129)
Your Device’s microSD Card and
Adapter
The microSD Card
Your device is equipped with a preinstalled 16GB
SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity) memory card. It
allows you to store images, videos, music, and voice
data in your device.
Removing the microSD Card
1. Remove the battery cover.
䡲Grasp the device firmly and locate the cover
release latch.
䡲Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly
“pop” the cover off the device (similar to a soda
can).
2. Firmly press the card into the slot and release it.
The card should pop partially out of the slot.
3. Remove the card from the slot.
4. Replace the battery cover.
2H. microSD Card
Important: Camera, Camcorder, and Music playback
features are dependant on having a memory card
installed. Although the Epic 4G comes with a
16GB card (preinstalled), it can support cards of
up to 32GB.
Note: You can easily damage the microSD card and its
adapter by improper operation. Please be careful when
inserting, removing, or handling it.
SPH-D700.book Page 123 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
124 2H. microSD Card
Re-inserting the microSD Card
1. Remove the battery cover.
䡲Grasp the device firmly and locate the cover
release latch.
䡲Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly
“pop” the cover off the device (similar to a soda
can).
2. Orient the card with the gold strips facing down.
3. Firmly press the card into the slot and make sure
that it catches with the push-click insertion.
microSD Icon Indicators
The following icons show your microSD card
connection status at a glance:
– card has been unmounted (released from use)
from the device.
– card is being prepared for use and for
mounting.
– card has been removed.
WARNING: Do not over-insert the card as this can damage
the contact pins.
Note: Be sure to use only recommended microSD cards
(<32GB). Using non-recommended microSD cards
could cause data loss and damage your device.
Correct
Incorrect
microSD card Slot
Note: Make sure the microSD card's gold contacts are facing
down.
SPH-D700.book Page 124 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2H. microSD Card 125
microSD Card
microSD Adapter
The supplied microSD adapter allows you to use
microSD cards in other SD-compatible devices, like
computers, cameras, and printers. Before using the
microSD card with an SD-compatible device, you will
need to insert the microSD card into the microSD
adapter.
To insert the microSD card into the microSD adapter:
䊳With the label side of the microSD card facing up,
insert the card into the supplied microSD adapter,
and gently slide the card until it is fully inserted.
To remove the microSD card from the microSD adapter:
䊳Hold the front edge of the microSD card, and
gently pull it out to remove it from the adapter.
Write Protection
The microSD adapter has a built-in Write Protection
lock to prevent accidental overwriting or removal of
your data when the microSD card and adapter are
inserted in another device.
䊳Slide the Write Protection lock tab down into the
“Lock” position to prevent overwriting of data. To
allow data to be added or removed from the
microSD card, slide the Write Protection lock tab
up into the normal position.
Connecting Your Device to Your
Computer
Before using your device’s mass storage capabilities,
you need to prepare your device’s data services to
synchronize with your desktop or laptop computer.
Once you have connected the device to the computer,
you can transfer your data to or from the microSD card.
WARNING: DO NOT remove a microSD card while the
device is accessing or transferring files. Doing so
will result in loss or damage of data. Make sure
your battery is fully charged before using the
microSD card. Your data may become damaged
or lost if the battery runs out while you are using
the microSD card.
Note: If you experience a setup issue, refer to the
“Troubleshooting USB Connection” on page 127.
SPH-D700.book Page 125 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
126 2H. microSD Card
Before You Begin
Here is what you will need to have before you can
successfully establish a connection between your Epic
4G and a PC.
䢇microSD card (internally installed prior to start)
䢇compatible USB cable (included)
1. With the microSD card installed, connect your
device to your computer using a compatible USB
cable. (Wait for the connection to be completed.
When connected, the host computer will
automatically detect your device.)
2. The USB icon ( ) now appears in the top left
Notifications area on your device.
3. Tap Mass Storage from the Select USB mode
screen.
䡲Charging uses the connected USB cable to
charge the device via your computer’s USB port.
䡲Mass Storage uses the connected USB cable to
provide data communication between the device
and your computer. The device then appears as
an external drive with its own drive letter.
䡲Tethered Mode allows your computer to obtain an
external data connection by using the device’s
wireless data services and a wired USB
connection. Choose from 3G tethered mode or 4G
tethered mode.
●A wireless data connection can be done by
using the device’s Sprint Hotspot feature
(page 181).
4. Touch and drag down the Status screen to reveal
the Notifications page (or from the Home screen
press and tap Notifications).
5. Tap USB connected > Mount to join the card to your
device. This “mounting” allows you to access and
copy files between your computer and your
device's microSD card.
6. Locate the newly created drive letter on your
computer. You can now begin to use the microSD
card as a storage device.
Important: The external microSD card MUST BE MOUNTED
before your computer detects it and you are able
to communicate with it.
SPH-D700.book Page 126 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2H. microSD Card 127
microSD Card
To remove the connection:
䊳When you have finished transferring data, click the
USB device icon on your computer's taskbar, and
follow the onscreen instructions to safely unplug
the USB cable.
Troubleshooting USB Connection
If there is ever a circumstance where your setup of the
device’s USB connection has an issue, try these
troubleshooting tips.
1. Verify your computer is able to access the Internet
prior to connection and that this connection is not
lost during these troubleshooting procedures.
䡲Some system connection might require additional
setup data available online.
2. Once the device is connected to the computer via
USB, select Connect to PC to begin the USB
connection setup.
䡲Selecting the Charge option closes the USB data
connection.
䡲Verify the device screen shows Connected to PC.
3. From the Found New Hardware Wizard, select Install
the software automatically and click Next.
4. Select a connection to the Internet and click Next.
5. If a Cannot install this Hardware screen appears,
follow these steps:
䡲Click Finish.
䡲From your Desktop, right-click on the My
Computer icon and select Properties (from the
onscreen context menu).
䡲Click the Hardware tab and select the Device
Manager.
䡲Open the ? Other devices section from the list.
Confirm there is a USB MMC Storage item listed.
●This entry indicates an error occurred during
the USB driver installation process.
䡲Using your mouse, right-click on USB MMC
Storage and select Update Driver....
䡲From the Found New Hardware Wizard, select
Install the software automatically and click Next >
Finish.
SPH-D700.book Page 127 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
128 2H. microSD Card
Transferring data directly to and from the
microSD
You can access the microSD card and use it just as
easily as any other communicating storage device.
1. Connect the USB cable and on the phone screen,
touch Connect to PC.
2. From your Desktop, double-click My Computer >
[device drive letter] entry to display the folders and
files currently available on the internal microSD
card.
3. Open a folder on your computer and begin the
transfer process of files from your computer to the
internal card’s target folder.
To remove the connection:
1. When you have finished transferring data, click the
USB device icon on your computer’s taskbar, and
follow the onscreen instructions to safely unplug
the USB cable.
2. To complete the disconnect process, touch and
drag the Disconnect slider.
Creating Folders in the microSD Card
1. From your Desktop, double-click My Computer >
[device drive letter].
2. Right-click and select New > Folder.
microSD Card Settings
Viewing Memory in the microSD Card
The Epic 4G allows you to review the memory
allocation of both your device’s internal storage and
that of the microSD card.
1. Press > and tap >
SD card & phone storage.
Note: This process can be reversed from copying data from
the microSD card back to the connected computer.
WARNING: Do not alter or delete the four default folders.
These are used by the phone to parse-out the
different file formats and contents.
SPH-D700.book Page 128 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2H. microSD Card 129
microSD Card
2. Review the available information.
䡲The storage capacity page is divided into two
sections: External SD card and Internal phone
storage.
3. Press to return to the previous page.
Formatting the microSD Card
Formatting a microSD card permanently removes all
files stored on the card.
1. Press > and tap >
SD card & phone storage.
2. Touch Unmount SD card to release the microSD
card from its use by the device. The icon
appears within the Notifications area to indicate an
unmounted internal microSD card.
3. Once released, tap Format SD card > Format SD
card > Erase everything.
䡲Once completely formatted, the card is
automatically re-mounted (reconnected for use by
the device).
Important Connection Information
䢇To avoid loss of data, DO NOT remove the USB
cable, the microSD card, or the battery while
accessing or transferring files.
䢇DO NOT use your computer to change or edit folder
or file names on the microSD card, and do not
attempt to transfer large amounts of data from the
computer to the microSD card. Doing so may cause
the microSD card to fail.
䢇DO NOT turn off or restart your computer, or put it
into standby mode, while using a mass storage
device. Doing so will result in loss or damage of data.
䢇The microSD card can only be mounted for use by
either the device or a connected computer. Prior to
accessing the card via a different method, it must first
be unmounted from its current device (phone or
computer-USB).
Important: The formatting procedure erases all the data on
the microSD card, after which the files CANNOT
be retrieved. To prevent the loss of important data,
please check the contents before you format the
card.
SPH-D700.book Page 129 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
130 2H. microSD Card
Important: The microSD card can only share a connection
with one device at a time, either your device or
your computer (via its USB connection), not both.
You can not browse the contents of the card via
your device if they are currently being browsed via
your PC.
SPH-D700.book Page 130 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2I. Camera 131
Camera
⽧Taking Pictures (page 131)
⽧Recording Videos (page 137)
Taking Pictures
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the lens, and
pressing a button.
To take a picture:
1. Press and hold the camera key ( ) located
on the side of the device.
– or –
Press and tap > to activate the
camera mode. (Additional camera options are
available through the camera settings page. See
“Camera Settings” on page 132 for more
information.)
Note: The storage card that comes installed on your device
allows you to use the camera and camcorder features.
All pictures and videos are stored on the external 16GB
microSD card. The Epic 4G supports SDHC cards of
up to 32GB.
2I. Camera
SPH-D700.book Page 131 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
132 2I. Camera
2. Holding the phone in landscape mode, use the
display screen as a viewfinder and aim the camera
lens at your subject.
3. Press or tap until the shutter sounds.
(Your device automatically saves the picture to the
DCIM folder on the microSD card.)
Camera Settings
From camera mode ( ), touch the arrow ( ) on
the left side panel to display settings options.
䡲Shooting mode to select a mode for shooting
pictures. This determines how many images are
shot and if any effects are applied to them.
●Choose from: Single shot (default), Self shot,
Beauty, Smile shot, Continuous, Panorama,
Vintage, Add me, Action shot and Cartoon.
䡲Flash to select a flash setting. Choose from: Auto
flash (default), Off, and On.
Important: Use the Up and Down Volume buttons to zoom in
and out on your subject. Up to 4x zoom is
available.
Note: Access a menus multiple options by tapping the
onscreen arrows.
Note: Self shot uses the Epic 4G’s front-facing camera lens,
so you can still use the display screen to see what
you're shooting.
Mode
Image ViewerFocus area
Shooting mode Image settings
Camera settings
SPH-D700.book Page 132 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2I. Camera 133
Camera
䡲Exposure value to adjust the overall image
brightness. Use the onscreen slider to adjust the
value.
䡲Settings to access the camera options and
settings:
●Camera: to configure the camera hardware
parameters (page 133).
●Settings: provides additional image shooting
options.
䡲Focus area to force the camera to focus on a
specific area on the display, even if it's not in the
center of the frame. This is useful of you want to
make sure that even though an object isn’t in the
center of the shot it will still be in focus.
䡲Mode to toggle between the camera and
camcorder modes.
䡲Shoot to take the picture. Press or tap
to capture the shot.
䡲Image Viewer to review the saved pictures. Tap the
arrows to view additional pictures.
●Additional features in the viewer include
Share, Set as, Delete and magnify.
Camera Options and Settings
Tap the settings icon to access the options and
settings screens where there are two available tabs.
䊳Tap OK to exit from a menu and return to the
Settings tab.
– or –
Tap a setting option to reveal an onscreen
description.
䢇Camera for general camera settings:
䡲Outdoor visibility to adjust the display screen for
better viewing outdoors.
䡲Focus mode to set the focal properties of the
camera lens. Choose from Auto focus (default),
Macro (close up images), or Face detection (focus
is on people’s faces in front of the camera).
䡲Scene mode to select a camera setting for better
image capture under different lighting
environments. Choose from: None (default),
Portrait, Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor,
Beach/Snow, Sunset, Dawn, Fall colour, Firework,
Text, Candlelight and Backlight.
SPH-D700.book Page 133 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
134 2I. Camera
䡲Timer to set a time delay before the camera
remotely takes a picture (self-timer). Once a time
is selected, and you click the shoot button, you
will hear and see a countdown before the image
is taken. Choose from: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, or 10 sec.
䡲Resolution to set the image resolution. Choose
from: 5M (2560x1920), W4M (2560x1536
widescreen), 3.2M (2048x1536), W2.4M
(2048x1232 widescreen), 2M (1600x1200), W1.5M
(1600x960 widescreen), 0.3M (640x480), or
W0.4M (800x480 widescreen).
䡲White balance to compensate for color differences
found within different lighting conditions. Choose
from: Auto (default), Daylight, Cloudy,
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.
䡲Effects to apply different color effects onto
images. Choose from: Normal (default), Negative,
Black and White or Sepia.
䡲ISO to assign a shutter speed. Choose from:
Auto (default), 100, 200, 400, or 800.
䡲Metering to determine the way in which the
camera determines the exposure. Choose from:
Centre-weighted (default), Spot, or Matrix.
䡲Anti-Shake to help prevent blurriness due to
normal movements and shaking while taking the
picture.
䡲Auto contrast to provide clear images even under
backlight conditions where the light can vary the
image.
䡲Blink detection to warn you of possible subject
blinking before you shoot an image.
䡲Image quality to set the image quality for your
image. Choose from: Superfine (default), Fine, or
Normal.
䡲Adjust to manually adjust image contract, color
saturation levels, and sharpness.
䢇Settings for additional image settings:
䡲Guidelines to view image guidelines on your
screen as you take a picture.
䡲Review to display the recently shot image for
review. Choose from: Off, 2 sec, or On.
䡲GPS to record GPS information into the image file.
䡲Shutter sound to assign a sound when the image
is taken. Choose from: Sound 1 (default), Sound 2,
Sound 3, or Off.
SPH-D700.book Page 134 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2I. Camera 135
Camera
䡲Reset to reconfigure your camera settings back to
their defaults.
View Your Pictures
The Gallery is where you can
access the Gallery of stored
camera images.
1. Press and
tap > .
2. Select a folder location
(ex: Camera) and tap an
image to view your picture.
●Pressing from
the main Gallery
screen reveals gallery-
specific options Share,
Delete, and More.
●From the image folder, touch and hold any
desired images to select them (indicated by a
green checkmark) and press for
options such as Share (Picasa, Bluetooth,
Gmail, Email, and Messaging), Delete, and
More (Details, Set as, Crop, Rotate left, or
Rotate Right).
●Tap an image to open it, and press for
options such as Share (Facebook, Email,
Picasa, AllShare, Messaging, Bluetooth, or
Gmail), Delete, and More (Details, Set as, Crop,
Rotate left, or Rotate Right).
●Press to return to the previous screen.
Camera Image Settings
1. Press and tap > .
2. From Camera gallery, tap an image icon to open
the image.
䡲Use the zoom buttons (upper-right of the image)
to zoom in or out.
Note: Picture options can also be accessed by touching
and holding the image from the gallery. These options
include: Share, Delete, and More.
Note: Tap an onscreen image to display the available options
(Zoom, Slideshow, or Menu).
SPH-D700.book Page 135 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
136 2I. Camera
3. Tap Slideshow to initiate an onscreen slideshow
displaying every image in the current folder.
– or –
Tap Menu to display the following image menu
options:
䡲Share to activate the picture share menu from
which you can choose to share the current image
via one of many options:
●Facebook to insert your image into your
Facebook page.
●Email to attach your image to a new email
message.
●Picasa to upload your image to your Picasa
account. Tap Upload to complete the process.
●AllShare to use the AllShare application to
share your image with other communicating
devices (page 209).
●Messaging to insert your image into a new
outgoing MMS message (multimedia text
message).
●Bluetooth to send the image to another device
via Bluetooth.
●Gmail to attach your image to a new Gmail
email message.
䡲Delete to delete the image.
SPH-D700.book Page 136 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2I. Camera 137
Camera
䡲More to open additional image options such as:
Details, Set as, Crop, Rotate Left, and Rotate Right.
●Details to display image details such as Title,
Type, Date taken, Album, Location, Latitude,
and Longitude.
●Set as to assign the image as either the
Wallpaper (Home screen background) or to a
current Contact icon (display image).
●Crop to crop the image. Crop the image and
tap Save to a new version of the original.
●Rotate to rotate the image. Options include:
Rotate left or Rotate right.
Assigning Pictures
After taking a picture, assign it as a picture ID for a
Contacts entry or as the Home screen background
image (wallpaper).
1. Press and tap > .
2. From the Camera gallery (or other image folder),
tap an image icon to open the image.
3. With the picture displayed, tap Menu > More > Set
as, and select an option.
䡲Wallpaper to assign the picture as a background
image. Crop the image by dragging the orange
border box and tap Save to assign the picture.
䡲Contact icon to assign the picture to a Contacts
entry as a picture ID. Tap an entry from the
Contacts tab, crop the image by dragging the
orange border box and tap Save to assign the
picture.
Recording Videos
In addition to taking pictures, you can record, view, and
send videos with your device’s built-in video camera.
1. Press and hold the camera key ( ) located
on the side of the device.
– or –
Press and tap > to activate
camera mode.
SPH-D700.book Page 137 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
138 2I. Camera
2. Tap in the upper right corner to activate
camcorder mode ( ).
3. Holding the phone in landscape mode, use the
display screen as a viewfinder and aim the camera
lens at your subject.
4. Select a recording mode:
䡲Normal: the file size limit is determined by the
available storage space remaining in your SDHC
storage card.
䡲Limit for MMS: the file size is limited by the
restriction placed on video files that can be
attached to MMS text messages. Depending on
your settings, this can be up to 50 seconds.
5. Press or tap to begin recording.
6. Press or tap to stop recording. (Your
device automatically saves the video within the
DCIM folder on the microSD card.)
Camcorder Settings
From camcorder mode ( ), touch the arrow ( )
on the left side panel to display settings options.
Important: Use the Up and Down Volume buttons to zoom in
and out on your subject. Up to 4x zoom is
available.
Note: Access a menus multiple options by tapping the
onscreen arrows.
Mode
Video ViewerFocus area
Recording mode Video settings
Camcorder settings
SPH-D700.book Page 138 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2I. Camera 139
Camera
䡲Recording mode to set the image quality for your
image. Choose from: Normal (for SDHC card
storage) or Limit for MMS (sending the video in an
MMS/video message).
䡲Flash set the flash on or off.
䡲Exposure value to adjust the overall image
brightness. Use the onscreen slider to adjust the
value.
䡲Settings to access the camera options and
settings:
●Camcorder: to configure the camera hardware
parameters (page 139).
●Settings: provides additional image shooting
options.
䡲Mode to toggle between the camcorder and
camera modes.
䡲Shoot touch to begin shooting the video.
䡲Video Viewer to review the saved videos. Tap the
onscreen arrows to view additional videos.
●Additional features in the viewer include
Share, Play, or Delete.
Camcorder Options and Settings
Tap the settings icon to access the options and
settings screens where there are two available tabs.
䊳Tap OK to exit from a menu and return to the
Settings tab.
– or –
Tap a setting option to reveal an onscreen
description.
䢇Camcorder for general camera settings:
䡲Outdoor visibility to adjust the display screen for
better viewing outdoors.
䡲Timer to set a time delay before the camcorder
remotely shoots a video (self-timer). Once a time
is selected, and you click the shoot button, you
will hear and see a countdown before the video is
shot. Choose from: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, or 10 sec.
䡲Resolution to set the video resolution. Choose
from: 1280x720, 720x480, 640x480, 320x240, or
176x144.
SPH-D700.book Page 139 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
140 2I. Camera
䡲White balance to compensate for color differences
found within different lighting conditions. Choose
from: Auto (default), Daylight, Cloudy,
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.
䡲Effects to apply different color effects onto videos.
Choose from: Normal (default), Negative, Black
and White or Sepia.
䡲Video quality to set the quality for your video.
Choose from: Superfine (default), Fine, or Normal.
䡲Adjust to manually adjust video contrast, color
saturation levels, and sharpness.
䢇Settings for additional video settings:
䡲Guidelines enable to view guidelines on your
screen as you shoot the video.
䡲Audio recording enable the recording of audio
within your video. Remove the checkmark to turn
off this feature and record only video.
䡲Review enable the display the recently shot image
for review.
䡲Reset reconfigures your camcorder settings back
to their default parameters.
Video Settings
1. Press and tap > .
2. From Camera gallery, tap a video icon to begin
video playback.
– or –
Touch and hold the video icon to select the video
and display the following video menu context
menu options:
䡲Select all to place a checkmark on all files within
the current folder.
SPH-D700.book Page 140 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2I. Camera 141
Camera
䡲Unselect all to remove checkmarks on all files
within the current folder.
䡲Share to share the selected video via one of many
options:
●YouTube to upload your selected video file to a
YouTube page. Tap Upload to complete the
process.
●Messaging to attach your video to a new MMS
message.
●AllShare to utilize the AllShare application to
share your video with other communicating
devices.
●Bluetooth to send your selected videos to an
external Bluetooth-compatible device.
●Email to attach your video to a new email
message.
●Gmail to attach your video to a new Gmail
email message.
䡲Delete to delete the current video.
䡲More to open additional video options such as:
●Details to display video details such as Title,
Type, Date taken, Album, Location, Latitude,
and Longitude.
SPH-D700.book Page 141 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
142 2J. Bluetooth
⽧Turning Bluetooth On and Off (page 142)
⽧Using the Bluetooth Settings Menu (page 143)
⽧Pairing Bluetooth Devices (page 144)
⽧Sending Contacts via Bluetooth (page 146)
⽧Disconnecting Bluetooth Connection During an Active
Call (page 147)
About Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology
that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of
Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and hands-free
car kits, and Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers,
printers, and wireless devices. The Bluetooth
communication range is usually up to approximately
30 feet.
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
By default, your device’s Bluetooth feature is set to Off.
Turning Bluetooth on activates the internal Bluetooth
antenna.
To turn Bluetooth on:
1. Press > and tap >
Wireless & networks.
2. Tap Bluetooth to activate it (a green checkmark
indicates it is active). When active, appears
within the Status area.
To turn Bluetooth off:
䊳Press > and tap >
Wireless & networks > Bluetooth.
䡲Tap to remove the green checkmark and
deactivate Bluetooth.
2J. Bluetooth
Note: Activating Bluetooth can drain your battery faster and
reduce your available usage times. It is recommended
that if you do not need it active, turn it off.
It is also recommended to turn off your Bluetooth within
locations that prohibit its use.
SPH-D700.book Page 142 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2J. Bluetooth 143
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Status Indicators
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection
status at a glance:
– Bluetooth is active
– Bluetooth is connected (paired) and
communicating
[no icon] – Bluetooth is disabled (default status)
Using the Bluetooth Settings Menu
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many
of the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,
including:
䢇Entering or changing the name your device uses for
Bluetooth communication and description
䢇Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for
other Bluetooth devices
䢇Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1. Press > and tap >
Wireless & networks > Bluetooth settings.
2. Set your Bluetooth options: Device name, Visible,
and Scan devices.
Bluetooth Stereo
Bluetooth Phone
Bluetooth Computer
Bluetooth Active
Bluetooth Settings
Headset
SPH-D700.book Page 143 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
144 2J. Bluetooth
To change your Bluetooth name:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Device name.
3. Tap the Device name field and enter a new name.
4. Tap OK to complete the rename process.
To make your device visible:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible.
䡲Making your device visible allows it to be
detected by other devices for pairing and
communication.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan devices
to search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible
devices such as headsets, devices, printers, and
computers.
Pairing Bluetooth Devices
Paired Devices
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish
trusted connections between your device and another
Bluetooth device. When you pair devices, they share a
passkey, allowing for fast, secure connections while
bypassing the discovery and authentication process.
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible. Your
device must be visible to successfully pair with an
external device.
3. Tap Scan devices. (Your device will display a list of
discovered in-range Bluetooth devices.
4. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.
5. Enter the passkey or PIN code and tap OK.
6. The external device will then have to also accept
the connection and enter your device’s PIN code.
Note: Your device is visible for up to 120 seconds
(2 minutes). This value appears as a countdown within
this field.
SPH-D700.book Page 144 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2J. Bluetooth 145
Bluetooth
䡲Once successfully paired to an external device,
appears within the Status area.
To disconnect a paired device:
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection
between the device and your Epic 4G, but retains the
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you
wish to reconnect the device, there is no need to setup
the connection information again.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch the
previously paired device (from the bottom of the
page).
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.
– or –
From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold
the name of the previously paired device, and
select Disconnect.
To delete a paired device (unpair):
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection
record” and upon reconnection would require that you
re-enter all the previous pairing information.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold
the name of the previously paired device (from the
bottom of the page). This opens the connected
device’s menu options.
3. Tap Disconnect or Disconnect & unpair to confirm
deletion.
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations
may be different, and functions such as transfer or
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth-
compatible devices.
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time
process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices
will continue to recognize their partnership and
exchange information without having to re-enter a
passcode again.
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur
automatically if the paired device goes out of range of
your Epic 4G or it is powered off.
SPH-D700.book Page 145 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
146 2J. Bluetooth
To access a paired device’s settings:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold
the name of the previously paired device.
3. Tap Options and configure the desired options.
4. Press to return to the previous page.
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and
capabilities, you may be able to send pictures,
Contacts information, or other items using a Bluetooth
connection.
1. Press and
tap .
2. Touch an entry to open
its overview page.
3. Press and tap
Send namecard via >
Bluetooth.
4. Tap a paired device.
䡲The external Bluetooth
device must be visible
and communicating for
the pairing to be
successful.
See “Sending Contacts” on
page 101.
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.
In addition to Contact’s information, other file types
(video, image, or audio) can be sent using Bluetooth.
Note: If no devices are detected, tap Scan devices to begin a
new search.
SPH-D700.book Page 146 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
2J. Bluetooth 147
Bluetooth
Disconnecting Bluetooth
Connection During an Active Call
䊳During an active call, where the audio is being
routed through a connected Bluetooth device
(headset or hands-free connection), tap Bluetooth
to route the device’s audio through the connected
Bluetooth headset (On) or through the speaker
(Off).
䡲When the call is routed to a Bluetooth headset,
the current call area is surrounded by a blue box,
the Bluetooth button indicates it’s on, and shows
the Bluetooth call icon ( ).
䡲When turned off, the call is routed through either
the earpiece or speaker, the call area is
surrounded by a green box, the Bluetooth button
indicates its off, and shows ( ).
Note: Communication can be toggled between the Bluetooth
headset and the device speaker by tapping the
Headset button On or Off.
SPH-D700.book Page 147 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
SPH-D700.book Page 148 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Section 3
Sprint Service
SPH-D700.book Page 149 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
150 3A. Sprint Service: The Basics
⽧Visual Voicemail (page 150)
⽧Text Messaging (SMS) (page 156)
⽧Multimedia Messaging (MMS) (page 158)
⽧Caller ID (page 162)
⽧Call Waiting (page 162)
⽧Making a 3-Way Call (page 163)
⽧Call Forwarding (page 164)
⽧Roaming (page 164)
Visual Voicemail
Visual Voicemail gives you a quick and easy way to
access your voicemail. Now you can find exactly the
message you are looking for without having to listen to
every voicemail message first. This new feature
periodically goes out to your voicemail, and gathers the
caller information from all of the current voicemails.
It then populates a list with the caller name and
number, along with the length of time and priority level
of the voicemail message.
Setting Up Your Visual Voicemail
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered
calls to your voicemail, even if your device is in use or
turned off. You should set up your Sprint voicemail and
personal greeting as soon as your device is activated.
1. Press and tap .
2. Tap Personalize now and follow the system
prompts to:
䡲Create a password (part of standard voicemail).
䡲Record your name announcement.
䡲Record your greeting.
3. When prompted to enter information, tap Dialpad to
bring up the onscreen dialpad to enter your
numeric responses.
3A. Sprint Service:
The Basics
Note: To set up your traditional voicemail box, see“Setting Up
Your Voicemail” on page 5.
SPH-D700.book Page 150 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics 151
Sprint Service
4. Once you have
completed the setup
process, return to the
voicemail page (see
step 1).
5. Tap the Welcome to
Voicemail message on
the screen to play a brief
explanation of the
voicemail services.
The following is a description
of the features available while
reviewing a voicemail
message.
䡲Timeline provides a visual timeline for the current
message. Touch and drag this bar to scrub
through the message to different points.
●Tap to pause the playback, tap
to resume.
䡲Call to call the person who left the voicemail
message.
䡲Reply to reply to the message. You can then reply
to the sender or forward it to anyone with either
an email or phone number. This allows you to
send this voicemail message to several recipients
at the same time. You can tag the reply message
for both Urgency and Privacy.
●Tap Send to deliver the new message.
䡲Speaker Off/On to turn the speakerphone on or off
during playback. If the speakerphone feature was
enabled within the Voicemail Settings menu, the
speakerphone will always be automatically
enabled during voicemail playback (page 153).
䡲Delete to delete the current voicemail message.
Tap OK to confirm the deletion.
Note: Voicemail Password
Sprint strongly recommends that you create a
password when setting up your voicemail to protect
against unauthorized access. Without a password,
anyone who has access to your device is able to
access your voicemail messages.
Note: Press > Lock to prevent the message from
accidentally being deleted.
SPH-D700.book Page 151 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
152 3A. Sprint Service: The Basics
Listening to Multiple Voicemail Messages
When you are done listening to a voicemail message
you can easily access other voicemail messages
without returning to the main voicemail screen.
1. Listen to the current voicemail message.
2. Swipe your finger left or right to display the next or
previous message. (It will begin playing
automatically.)
You can navigate through voicemail messages as
frequently as you'd like. You can even move to the next
or previous message before you're finished listening to
the current one.
Configuring Voicemail Options
To access the voicemail menu options:
1. Press and tap .
2. Press and select from the following:
䡲Compose to compose a new voicemail message.
䡲Play all new to listen to all new messages.
䡲Undelivered to list all undelivered voicemail
messages.
䡲Delete to delete selected messages from your
current list of available voicemail messages.
䡲Search to search through voicemail messages for
keywords.
䡲Settings to configure your voicemail application
settings.
To access a voicemail message’s options:
1. Press and tap .
2. Tap a voicemail message and press and
select from the following:
䡲Lock/Unlock to prevent deletion of the selected
voicemail message.
䡲Text message to create and deliver a new text
message to the sender’s phone number.
䡲Reply to reply to the voicemail. You can then reply
to the sender or forward it to anyone with either
an email or phone number. This allows you to
send this voicemail message to several recipients
at the same time.
䡲Forward to forward the voicemail to another
recipient.
SPH-D700.book Page 152 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics 153
Sprint Service
䡲Add to contacts to add the sender’s phone
number to your Contacts list.
Configuring Voicemail Settings
1. Press and tap .
2. Press and tap Settings. From this menu, you
can:
䡲Tap Notifications to determine how you are
notified of new voicemails. Choose from:
Notifications, Select ringtone, and Vibrate.
䡲Tap Pictures to replace the default Visual
Voicemail message icon with a specific Contacts
entry’s image. This image is pulled from the
entry’s Contacts details page (page 98).
䡲Tap Speakerphone to automatically activate the
speakerphone when you review your Visual
Voicemail (page 153).
䡲Tap Change greeting to adjust your voicemail
greeting (page 154).
䡲Tap From name to enter a name or number that is
attached to your outgoing voicemails as part of
an identification string (page 154).
䡲Tap Check for upgrade to search for an upgrade
to your Visual message software.
䡲Tap About Voicemail to view build information
about the current visual voicemail application.
Automatically Enabling the Speakerphone
Every time you access a selected message from your
Visual Voicemail list, you can configure the device to
automatically launch the built-in speakerphone so that
you can clearly hear the message.
1. Press and tap .
2. Press and tap Settings to make your
alterations.
䡲Tap Speakerphone to activate the feature. You will
see a green checkmark on the right.
䡲Tap Speakerphone again to deactivate the
speakerphone. The checkmark will be grayed out.
Note: Voicemail settings can also be accessed by pressing
> and tapping Settings > Call settings >
Voicemail settings.
SPH-D700.book Page 153 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
154 3A. Sprint Service: The Basics
Changing Your Main Greeting via the
Voicemail Menu
Your main greeting can be changed directly via the
Visual Voicemail system. This direct access saves you
from having to navigate within the voicemail menu.
1. Press and tap .
2. Press and tap Settings > Change greeting.
3. Tap OK to connect to the Sprint voicemail system
and follow the prompts to change your current
greeting.
Editing the From Name via the Voicemail
Menu
From your Visual Voicemail menu, you can quickly
change the name or number attached to your voice
messages.
1. Press and tap .
2. Press and tap Settings > From name.
3. Tap the existing identification field and enter a new
identifying name or number (used to identify you
to recipients of your voice messages).
4. Tap OK to save your information.
Voicemail Notification
There are several ways your device alerts you to a new
message:
䢇By sounding the assigned ringer type.
䢇By displaying within the Notifications area of
the Status bar when a single new unheard voicemail
message is received.
䢇By displaying within the Notifications area of
the Status bar when multiple new unheard voicemail
messages have been received.
3
SPH-D700.book Page 154 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics 155
Sprint Service
Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages
You can review your messages directly from your
wireless device (using either traditional voicemail or
Visual Voicemail) or from any other touch-tone phone.
To dial from your wireless device, either speed dial your
voicemail or use the menu keys.
Using Traditional Voicemail to Access Your
Messages
1. Press and tap .
2. Touch and hold . If prompted, enter your
voicemail password.
Using Visual Voicemail to Access Your Messages
1. Press and tap .
2. Tap an entry to listen to the message.
Using Another Phone to Access Messages
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
2. When your voicemail answers, tap .
3. Enter your password.
Using Visual Voicemail to Delete Your Messages
1. Press and tap .
2. Touch and hold a voicemail entry from the list and
tap Delete this message > OK.
– or –
Open a message and tap > OK to delete it.
Note: When you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint
Network, you may not receive notification of new
voicemail messages. Sprint recommends that you
periodically check your voicemail by dialing 1 + area
code + your wireless phone number. When your
voicemail answers, tap and enter your password.
Roaming rates apply when you access voicemail while
roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network.
Your device accepts messages even when it is turned
off. However, your device notifies you of new messages
only when it is turned on and you are in a Sprint service
area.
Note: You are charged for airtime minutes when you are
accessing your voicemail from your wireless device.
SPH-D700.book Page 155 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
156 3A. Sprint Service: The Basics
Text Messaging (SMS)
With text messaging (SMS), you can send and receive
instant text messages between your wireless device
and another messaging-ready phone. When you
receive a new message, it will automatically display on
your device’s screen.
Messaging is available via the Messaging application
in your Applications screen. This icon ( ) appears
in Status bar area when a new text message is
received.
Viewing Notifications of Received Messages
When you receive a message, your device notifies you
by displaying an icon within the Notification area at the
top left of your Home screen.
䡲 indicates a new text or MMS messages
were received.
1. Press > and tap (Notifications).
– or –
Touch and hold the Status bar, then slide your
finger down the screen. (See “Using the
Notifications Panel” on page 40.)
2. Tap a message entry to open the Messaging
application.
Composing Text Messages
1. Press and tap > New message.
2. Tap the To field and enter a Contacts name, a
mobile phone number, or an email address using
either the onscreen or QWERTY keyboards.
䡲Contacts as you enter either a phone number or
email address, if the information matches a
current contact’s entry information, you will see a
match. When you see a match, touch the
associated name to complete the addressing.
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for text
messaging and SMS voice messaging.
Note: If you are using an onscreen keyboard, you can switch
between the default Swype to Android keyboard text
entry method. Touch and hold either the To or the Type
to compose field, tap Input method, and select your
preferred method.
SPH-D700.book Page 156 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics 157
Sprint Service
䡲Mobile to enter a wireless phone number directly.
䡲Email to enter the recipient’s email address.
3. If applicable, tap a matching entry from the
onscreen drop-down list. This list is populated by
matches found from your managed accounts.
4. Touch the Type to compose field and enter your
message. (For information on entering text and
special characters such as emoticons [smileys],
see “Entering Text Using the Android Keyboard” on
page 41, “Entering Text Using Swype” on page 45,
or “Entering Text Using the QWERTY Keyboard” on
page 51.)
5. Review your message and tap Send.
Accessing Text Messages
To read a text message:
䊳When you receive a text message, you will see it
listed within the Messaging screen. Touch the
message to open the message and then scroll
down and view its entire content.
To reply to a text message:
1. While the message is open, tap the Type to
compose field and then type your reply message.
2. Compose your reply or use the preset messages
or icons.
䡲To type a message, use an onscreen keyboard or
the QWERTY keyboard. (For information on
entering text and special characters such as
emoticons [smileys], see Entering Text Using the
Android Keyboard, “Entering Text Using Swype”
on page 45, or “Entering Text Using the QWERTY
Keyboard” on page 51.)
3. Review your reply and tap Send.
– or –
You may select additional messaging options by
pressing , and then tapping Send.
䡲Options may include: Call, View contact, Add
subject, Attach, Send, or More (Insert Smiley, Delete
thread, All threads, and Add to Contacts).
SPH-D700.book Page 157 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
158 3A. Sprint Service: The Basics
Multimedia Messaging (MMS)
With multimedia messaging (MMS), you can send and
receive instant text messages that contain text, pictures,
audio, recorded voice, or a picture slideshow.
Messaging is available via the Messaging application
in your Applications screen.
Composing MMS Messages
Composing MMS messages is exactly the same as
composing text messages, except that you attach a
picture, a video, or an audio file to the message.
1. Press and tap > New message.
2. Tap the To: field and enter a Contact's name, a
mobile phone number, or an email address. As
you enter text and numbers, matching contacts
appear onscreen.
䡲If applicable, tap an available matching recipient
or continue entering the phone number or email
address.
3. Touch the Type to compose field and enter your
message.
4. Press and tap Attach.
5. Select a multimedia attachment type:
䡲Pictures: Opens the Gallery application. Use the
onscreen navigation to select the picture you wish
to send with the outgoing message.
䡲Capture picture: Opens the camera application.
Take a picture, and then tap Save to use this
image in your message. (See “Taking Pictures” on
page 131.)
䡲Videos: Opens the Gallery application. Use the
onscreen navigation to select a video and attach
it to your outgoing message.
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for text
messaging and MMS voice messaging.
Note: From the Messages screen, you can also touch New
message to begin creating a new outgoing message.
SPH-D700.book Page 158 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics 159
Sprint Service
䡲Capture video: Opens the camcorder application.
Shoot a video, and then tap Save to use this video
in your message. (See “Recording Videos” on
page 137.)
䡲Audio: Opens the Select audio menu. Use the
onscreen navigation to select an audio file and
tap OK.
䡲Record audio: Opens the message recorder
(shown below).
●Record Duration: length of the recorded voice
message.
●Volume Meter: displays the volume level.
●Record: starts recording your message.
●Play: plays back the recording.
●Stop: stops the recording. Once stopped, tap
either Use this recording (attach it to your
message), or Discard (delete the current
recording and re-record).
䡲Slideshow: Opens the Edit slideshow menu.
●Touch Add slide to create a new slide (this is a
placeholder for new images to be added,
similar to a playlist).
●Touch the created slide (example, Slide 1), tap
Add picture, and then select the picture you
want to add to the slide.
●Tap the text field below the image to enter a
caption for the picture.
Recording duration
Controls
Volume Meter
Record Play Stop
SPH-D700.book Page 159 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
160 3A. Sprint Service: The Basics
●When finished, tap to attach the
slideshow to your message.
6. When you are finished creating your new MMS
message, touch Send.
To view and play a multimedia message:
1. Press and tap .
2. From the message list, tap a multimedia message
to open its contents.
3. While the message is open, tap the play icon (on a
video or audio file) to play back the file or tap an
image to view a picture.
To reply to a multimedia message:
1. Press and tap .
2. From the message list, tap a multimedia message
to open its contents.
3. While the message is open, tap the Type to
compose field and then type your reply message.
4. Once complete, tap Send.
Note: To remove or replace a picture or an audio attachment,
on the Compose screen, tap the Remove button next
to the attachment.
Image Navigation
Caption Field
Current Image
Slideshow Controls
Tip: The file attachment on the MMS message can be saved
to the microSD card. To save the attachment, touch and
hold the file and tap Copy attached to SD card from the
Message options context menu.
SPH-D700.book Page 160 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics 161
Sprint Service
Deleting a Message or Message Thread
1. Press and tap .
2. Touch and hold the message entry to display the
context menu.
3. Tap Delete thread and once prompted, tap Delete
to complete the process. (From within a message,
you may need to tap More to display the Delete
thread option.)
䡲Tap Delete locked messages to place a green
checkmark and also include those messages that
have been locked.
Adjusting Message Settings
1. Press and tap .
2. From within the Messaging screen, press
and tap Settings.
3. Adjust the following fields according to your needs:
䡲Delete old messages: Enable this option to delete
older text messages that exceed the defined
maximum number of text messages limit set
below.
䡲Text message limit: Sets the maximum number of
text messages that can be stored on the device
(per conversation).
䡲Multimedia message limit: Sets the maximum
number of multimedia messages that can be
stored on the device (per conversation).
䡲Auto-retrieve: Enable this option to automatically
retrieve the entire content of your MMS message.
When checked, the MMS message header,
message body, and any attachments will
automatically download to your device.
●If you disable this option, only the MMS
message header will be retrieved and shown
in the message list.
䡲Roaming auto-retrieve: Disable this option if you
only desire the MMS message headers to
download while roaming. Enable this option to
automatically download your complete
multimedia messages even while roaming.
Note: When replying to a text message with an MMS
message, first open the text message, press and
tap Add subject or Attach. The original text message is
then automatically converted into a multimedia
message.
SPH-D700.book Page 161 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
162 3A. Sprint Service: The Basics
䡲Notifications: Enable this option if you wish to
receive a notification in the status bar when a new
text or multimedia message arrives.
䡲Select ringtone: Allows you to select a ringer to
sound when a new message is received. Tap this
option, and then select a ring tone that is specific
to new text and multimedia messages. A sample
will briefly be played upon selection.
䡲Vibrate: Enable this option if you want the device
to vibrate when a new text or multimedia
message is received.
Caller ID
Caller ID allows people to identify a caller before
answering the phone by displaying the number of the
incoming call. If you do not want your number
displayed when you make a call, follow these steps.
1. Press and tap > to access the
onscreen dialer.
2. Tap .
3. Enter a phone number and then press .
To permanently block your number, call Sprint
Customer Service.
Call Waiting
When you’re on a call, Call
Waiting alerts you to
incoming calls by sounding
two beeps. Your device’s
screen informs you that
another call is coming in
and displays the caller’s
phone number (if it is
available and you are in
digital mode).
To respond to an incoming
call while you’re on a call:
䊳Before accepting the
incoming call, drag the
onscreen caller to one
of the following
onscreen options:
Keypad
Keypad
PQRS
Holding Call
New Incoming Call
Call Options
SPH-D700.book Page 162 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics 163
Sprint Service
䡲Answer to answer the new call. The first caller is
placed on hold.
䡲Ignore to send the call to your voicemail box.
䡲Ignore with text to send the call to your voicemail
box and immediately send the caller a text
message. These Ignore messages can be
created and stored on the device.
To switch back to the first caller:
䊳From the In-Call options screen (shown here), tap
Swap.
Making a 3-Way Call
With 3-Way calling, you can talk to two people at the
same time. When using this feature, the normal airtime
rates will be charged for each of the two calls.
1. Press and tap > to access the
onscreen dialer.
2. Make your call to the first
recipient.
3. Once you have established
the connection, tap
Add call ().
䡲It may take up to 20
seconds for the button to
turn gray.
4. Enter the second caller’s
phone number and tap
or select a number
from your Contacts
( ). (Your first call is
automatically put on hold.)
5. When you’re connected to the second party,
tap Merge to combine both calls into a single
3-way call.
Tip: For those calls where you don’t want to be interrupted,
you can temporarily disable Call Waiting by pressing
before placing your call. Call Waiting is
automatically reactivated once you end the call.
PQRS
Keypad
Keypad
Add call
Add call
Contacts
Contacts
SPH-D700.book Page 163 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
164 3A. Sprint Service: The Basics
If one of the people you called hangs up during your
call, you and the remaining caller stay connected. If you
initiated the call and are the first to hang up, all callers
are disconnected.
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding lets you forward all your incoming calls
to another phone number – even when your device is
turned off. You can continue to make calls from your
phone when you have activated Call Forwarding.
To activate Call Forwarding:
1. Press and tap > to access the
onscreen dialer.
2. Tap .
3. Enter the area code and phone number to which
you want your calls forwarded.
4. Tap . (You will see a message and hear a
tone to confirm the activation of Call Forwarding.)
To deactivate Call Forwarding:
1. Press and tap > to access the
onscreen dialer.
2. Tap . (You will
see a message and hear a tone to confirm the
deactivation.)
Roaming
Roaming Icon
Your display screen always lets you know when you’re
off the Nationwide Sprint Network. Anytime you are
roaming, the phone displays the roaming icon ( ). If
you are roaming on a digital system, you will see the
roaming icon along with the text – Digital Roam – .
Keypad
Keypad
PQRS
Note: You are charged a higher rate for calls you have
forwarded.
Tip: Remember, when you are using your phone off the
Nationwide Sprint Network, always dial numbers using 11
digits (1 + area code + number).
Keypad
Keypad
PQRS
SPH-D700.book Page 164 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics 165
Sprint Service
Roaming on Other Digital Networks
When you’re roaming on digital networks, your call
quality and security is similar to the quality you receive
when making calls on the Nationwide Sprint Network.
However, you may not be able to access certain
features, such as data services, depending on the
available network.
Checking for Voicemail Messages While
Roaming
When you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint
Network, you may not receive on-phone notification of
new voicemail messages. Callers can still leave
messages, but you will need to periodically check your
voicemail for new messages if you are in a roaming
service area for an extended period of time.
1. Dial 1 + area code + your phone number and tap
.
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, tap .
3. Enter your password at the prompt and follow the
voice prompts.
When you return to the Nationwide Sprint Network,
voicemail notification will resume as normal.
Setting Roam Mode
Your device allows you to control your roaming
capabilities. By using the Roaming menu option, you
can determine which signals your device accepts.
Choose from three different settings on your dual-band
device to control your roaming experience.
1. Press > and tap > Wireless &
networks > Mobile networks.
2. Tap Data roaming to connect to data service while
roaming.
Note: If you’re on a call when you leave the Nationwide Sprint
Network, and your call is dropped in an area where you
think Sprint service is available, turn your phone off and
on again to reconnect to the network.
SPH-D700.book Page 165 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
166 3A. Sprint Service: The Basics
Call Guard
Your device has two ways of alerting you when you are
roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network: the
onscreen roaming icon and Call Guard. Call Guard
makes it easy to manage your roaming by requiring an
extra step before you can place or answer a roaming
call. (This additional step is not required when you
make or receive calls while on the Nationwide Sprint
Network.)
To turn Call Guard on or off:
1. Press > and tap > Call settings.
2. Touch Call Guard to toggle the active state of this
function. When active, an extra key press is
required for dialing when in a roaming area.
To place roaming calls with Call Guard on:
1. From standby mode, dial 1 + area code + the
seven-digit number and tap .
2. Touch OK.
To answer incoming roaming calls with Call Guard on:
1. Press . (A message is displayed notifying you
that roaming charges will apply.)
2. Tap OK.
System Select
1. Press > and tap > Call settings.
2. Tap System select to change the CDMA roaming
mode.
䡲Sprint only to access only the home area mobile
network, which is the Nationwide Sprint Network.
This option also prevents roaming on other
networks.
䡲Automatic to seek service on the Nationwide
Sprint Network. When Sprint service is
unavailable, the device searches for an alternate
system.
Note: Call Guard is turned on by default on your device.
Voice dialing and speed dialing are not available when
you are roaming with Call Guard enabled.
Note: If the Call Guard feature is set to On, you need to take
extra steps (such as dialing 1 + area code) to make
and receive roaming calls.
Answer
Answer
SPH-D700.book Page 166 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics 167
Sprint Service
Data Roam Guard
Depending on service availability and roaming
agreements, your device may be able to access data
services while roaming on certain digital systems.
You can set your device to alert you when you are
roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network and try to
use data services such as messaging.
To set your Data Roam Guard notification:
1. Press > and tap > Wireless &
networks > Mobile networks.
2. Tap Data Roaming Guard.
3. Tap an onscreen option: On or Off.
To use data services when Data Roam Guard is active:
䊳When a pop-up notification appears informing you
that data roam charges may apply, tap Connect or
Always Connect to connect.
Note: Data Roam Guard is turned on by default on your
device.
SPH-D700.book Page 167 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
168 3B. Web and Data Services
⽧Getting Started With Data Services (page 168)
⽧Navigating the Web (page 170)
⽧Wi-Fi (page 177)
⽧4G Services (page 179)
⽧Email (page 182)
⽧Using the Android Market (page 196)
⽧Applications (page 197)
Getting Started With Data Services
With your Sprint service, you are ready to start enjoying
the advantages of data services. This section will help
you learn the basics of using your data services,
including managing your user name, launching a data
connection, and navigating the Web with your device.
Your User Name
When you buy your device and sign up for service,
you’re automatically assigned a user name, which is
typically based on your name and a number, followed
by “@sprintpcs.com.” (For example, the third John
Smith to sign up for Sprint data services might have
jsmith003@sprintpcs.com as his user name.)
When you use data services, your user name is
submitted to identify you to the Nationwide Sprint
Network. Your user name is automatically programmed
into your device. You don’t have to enter it.
3B. Web and Data Services
Important: Certain data services requests may require
additional time to process. While your device is
loading the requested service, the touchscreen or
QWERTY keyboard may appear unresponsive
when in fact they are functioning properly. Allow
the device some time to process your data usage
request.
SPH-D700.book Page 168 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 169
Web and Data
Updating Your User Name
If you choose to change your user name and select a
new one online, or make any changes to your services,
you must then update the profile on your device.
1. Press > and tap >
About phone > System Updates.
2. Tap Update Profile.
Launching a Web Connection
䊳Press and tap > (Browser).
(Your data connection starts and you see the
home page.)
While connecting, you may see an animation. Once
complete, you are connected to the default home
page.
Data Connection Status and Indicators
Your device displays the current status of your data
connection through indicators at the top of the screen.
The following symbols are used:
Your device is connected to the high-speed 4G
Sprint Mobile Broadband Network. When the
signal bands are animated, your device is
scanning and connecting. During data transfer,
the animated icon is not used (for example,
when you are opening a Web page).
When the signal bands are gray, your device is
connected to the network, signal is weak.
When both the bands and the 4G icon are
gray, you there is no coverage and you are
disconnected from the 4G network.
Note: Internet connections can be made either through the
Sprint (3G or 4G) or via Wi-Fi (configured within the
Settings > Wireless & networks page).
Tip: To change the device’s default launch page to your
current page, press and tap More > Settings > Set
home page.
Note: The Browser automatically launches when a Web link
is touched from within either an email or text message.
SPH-D700.book Page 169 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
170 3B. Web and Data Services
Your device is connected to the high-speed
Sprint Mobile Broadband Network (EVDO).
When the signal bands are animated, your
device is transferring data (for example, when
you are opening a Web page); when the signal
bands are gray, your device is connected to the
network but is not currently transferring data (for
example, when you are viewing a Web page
that is completely open). In either state, you can
receive incoming calls.
If you do not see an indicator, your phone does not
have a current data connection. To launch a
connection, see “Launching a Web Connection” on
page 169.
Navigating the Web
Navigating through menus and websites during a data
session is easy once you have learned a few basics.
Scrolling
As with other parts of your device’s menu, you’ll have to
drag up and down to see everything on some
websites.
To scroll through a website’s page:
䊳In a single motion, touch and drag across or up
and down a page.
Selecting
To select onscreen items or links:
䊳Drag across a page, and then touch or tap an
onscreen link to select the link.
Links, which are displayed as underlined text, allow you
to jump to Web pages, select special functions, or even
place phone calls.
Note: Prior to gaining access to the SprintWeb home page,
you may be asked to enter your 10-digit PCS phone
number and tap OK. Entering your phone number is
not required for access to other Web pages.
SPH-D700.book Page 170 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 171
Web and Data
Pinching and Zooming
Zooming in and out on a Web page can be done now
without the need of an onscreen zoom tool. Just use
your fingers to pinch in or spread out on the screen.
To zoom in:
1. Place your thumb and index finger on the screen.
2. Bring them together (pinch) to zoom in.
To zoom out:
1. Place your thumb and index finger on the screen.
2. Expand them outward (spread) to zoom out.
Going Back
To go back one page:
䊳Press on your device. Repeat this process
to keep going back through your Web page history
of recently visited pages.
Going to a Web Page
1. Tap the Address field (top of the browser window)
and enter a new Web address.
䡲As you enter the address, possible matches are
displayed within an onscreen list. Tap an entry to
launch the desired website.
2. Tap Go to launch the new page.
Browser Menu
The browser menu offers additional options to expand
your use of the Web on your device.
Opening the Browser Menu
The browser menu may be opened anytime you have
an active data session, from any page you are viewing.
Note: You can use for deleting text (like a BACKSPACE
key) when you are entering text.
DEL
SPH-D700.book Page 171 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
172 3B. Web and Data Services
䊳From any open Web page, press .
(You will see the browser menu.)
Options available within the browser menu include:
䢇New window: Launches a new Internet window while
maintaining the current Web page active.
䢇Bookmarks: Allows you to access and manage your
bookmarks.
䢇Windows: Displays the currently active browser
windows as an onscreen list. Tap a window entry to
launch that window.
䢇Refresh: Reloads the current Web page.
䢇Forward: Returns you to a previously viewed page.
䢇More: Provide additional browser options:
䡲Add bookmark (Menu+a): Assigns the current Web
page as a new bookmark.
䡲Find on page (Menu+f): Searches the current Web
page for a word.
䡲Select text (Menu +e): Selects text from the current
Web page.
䡲Page info (Menu+g): Displays the Name and URL
(website address) of the site you’re currently
viewing.
䡲Share page (Menu +s): Allows you to send a URL
via Gmail, SMS, or Work Email (Outlook).
䡲Downloads (Menu+d): Keeps a list of previously
downloaded content.
䡲Settings (Menu+p): Lets you configure and
manage your browser settings.
䡲Brightness Setting: Lets you configure the screen
brightness only for the browser application.
SPH-D700.book Page 172 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 173
Web and Data
Selecting Text on a Web Page
1. While on an active Web
page, press to
open the browser menu.
2. Scroll to the area of the
webpage containing the
desired text.
3. Tap More > Select text.
4. Touch and drag across
the screen and highlight
the desired text. Any
selected text will appear
highlighted and then be
copied to the device’s
clipboard.
Going to a Specific Website
To go to a particular website by entering a URL (website
address):
1. Tap the URL field and enter a website address.
䡲As you type the address, if your desired website
appears within the suggested sites list, tap the
entry to begin surfing.
2. Tap Go.
Adjusting Browser Page Settings
1. Press to open the browser menu.
2. Tap More > Settings.
3. Navigate to the Page content settings area and
select from one of the following page settings:
䡲Text size: Adjusts the current onscreen text size.
Options include: Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, or
Huge.
䡲Default zoom: Sets the default browser viewing
size. Choose from: Far, Medium, or Close.
Note: These additional options can also be accessed via the
QWERTY keyboard by using a combination of the
Menu button ( ) and the specified key
combination.
Note: Not all websites are viewable on your device.
SPH-D700.book Page 173 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
174 3B. Web and Data Services
䡲Open pages in overview: Provides an overview of
recently opened pages.
䡲Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding.
䡲Block pop-up windows: Prevents popup
advertisement or windows from appearing
onscreen. Remove the checkmark to disable this
function.
䡲Load images: Allows web page images to be
loaded along with the other text components of a
loaded website.
䡲Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to
fit as much of the screen as possible.
䡲Landscape-only display: Displays pages only in
the wider landscape screen orientation. Uncheck
to view the page in Portrait mode.
䡲Enable Javascript: Enables javascript for the
current Web page. Without this feature, some
pages may not display properly. Remove the
checkmark to disable this function.
䡲Enable plug-ins: Enables browser plugins for the
current Web page. Some pages may require
plugins to properly display or function.
䡲Open in background: New pages are launched in
a separate page and displayed behind the
current one. Remove the checkmark to disable
this function.
䡲Set home page: Sets the current home page for
the Web browser (page 175).
Adjusting Browser Privacy Settings
1. Press to open the browser menu.
2. Tap More > Settings.
3. Navigate to the Privacy settings area and select
from one of the following privacy settings:
䡲Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data.
Tap OK to complete the process.
䡲Clear history: Clears the browser navigation
history. Tap OK to complete the process.
䡲Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies,
to save and read cookies from your device.
䡲Clear all cookie data: Clears all current browser
cookie files.
䡲Remember form data: Allows the device to store
data from any previously filled out forms. Remove
the checkmark to disable this function.
SPH-D700.book Page 174 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 175
Web and Data
䡲Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from
previously filled out forms. Tap OK to complete the
process.
䡲Enable location: Allows sites to request access to
your current location (using the built-in GPS).
䡲Clear location access: Clears location access for
all websites.
4. Press to return to the browser.
Adjusting Browser Security Settings
1. Press to open the browser menu.
2. Tap More > Settings.
3. Navigate to the Security settings area and select
from one of the following privacy settings:
䡲Remember passwords. Stores usernames and
passwords for visited sites. Remove the
checkmark to disable this function.
䡲Clear passwords. Deletes any previously stored
usernames or passwords. Tap OK to complete the
process.
䡲Show security warnings. Notifies you if there is a
security issue with the current website. Remove
the checkmark to disable this function.
4. Press to return to the browser.
Creating Website Settings
1. Press to open the browser menu.
2. Tap More > Settings > Website settings. These
advanced settings that can be configured for
individual sites (ex: Clear location access).
3. Tap OK to complete the process.
Resetting the Browser to Default
1. Press to open the browser menu.
2. Tap More > Settings > Reset to default.
3. Tap OK to complete the process.
Setting the Browser Home Page
1. Press to open the browser menu.
2. Tap More > Settings > Set home page.
3. Delete the current address and enter a new web
page.
SPH-D700.book Page 175 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
176 3B. Web and Data Services
4. Tap OK to complete the process.
Creating Bookmarks
1. From any open Web
page, press . (You
will see the browser
menu.)
2. Tap Bookmarks. Three
tabs are revealed:
䡲Bookmarks: Displays a
list of your current Web
bookmarks.
䡲Most visited: Displays a
list of your most
frequently visited
websites. Tap an entry to
launch the selected
page.
䡲History: Displays a record of your browsing
history. These records are organized into folders
such as: Today, Yesterday, 5 days ago, and
1 month ago.
3. Tap Add (first entry in the Bookmarks tab).
4. Enter a descriptive name for the new bookmark
and tap OK to store the new entry to your
Bookmarks list.
Creating Bookmarks From Other Tabs
1. From any open Web page, press >
Bookmarks.
2. Tap either the Most visited or History tab.
3. Touch and hold an entry from the list to display an
onscreen popup menu.
4. Tap Add bookmark to add the selected entry to
your current list of bookmarks.
– or –
1. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
2. Tap the star icon adjacent to a website address.
The star now turns gold. This adds the “starred”
website to your current Bookmarks list.
Creating a New Homepage
1. From any open Web page, press >
Bookmarks.
2. Tap either Most visited or History.
SPH-D700.book Page 176 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 177
Web and Data
3. Touch and hold an entry from the list to display an
onscreen popup menu.
4. Tap Set as homepage to assign the selected entry
as your new homepage.
Adding Bookmarks to Your Home Screen
1. From any open Web page, press .
2. Tap the Bookmarks tab.
3. Touch and hold an existing entry from the list to
display an onscreen popup menu.
4. Tap Add shortcut to Home to add the selected entry
to your Home screen.
Wi-Fi
About Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity") is a term used for
certain types of wireless local area networks (WLAN).
These device types use an 802.11 wireless
specification to transmit and receive wireless data.
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing
and accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These
WAPs can either be Open (unsecured) as within most
Hot Spots, or Secured (requiring knowledge of the
Router name and password).
The Epic 4G is capable of communication with devices
using 802.11n speeds (802.11n connections should
support data rates of over 100 Mbps). 802.11n also
offers better communication ranges over earlier Wi-Fi
standards due to increased signal intensity. The Epic
4G is backwards compatible with previous WAP
technologies (802.11b and 802.11g).
Turning Wi-Fi On and Off
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off.
Turning Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover
and connect to compatible in-range WAPs.
Turn Wi-Fi on:
1. Press > and tap >
Wireless & networks.
2. Tap the Wi-Fi field to activate the feature (green
checkmark indicates active). The device scans for
available in-range wireless networks.
SPH-D700.book Page 177 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
178 3B. Web and Data Services
To turn Wi-Fi off:
1. Press > and tap >
Wireless & networks > Wi-Fi.
2. Tap to remove the green checkmark and
deactivate Wi-Fi.
– or –
1. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.
2. Tap the onscreen Wi-Fi icon to turn off the Wi-Fi
service (turns gray when disabled).
To connect to a Wi-Fi network:
1. Press > and tap >
Wireless & networks > Wi-Fi settings.
䡲The network names and security settings (Open
network or Secured with xxx) of detected Wi-Fi
networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks
section.
2. To manually add your new network connection:
䡲Touch Add Wi-Fi network.
䡲Enter the Network SSID. This is the name of your
Wi-Fi network.
䡲Tap the Security field and select a security option.
This must match the current security setting on
your target network.
䡲If secured, you will also need to enter the wireless
password. The show password option, reveals the
password as you type it instead of showing only
asterisks (****).
䡲Tap Save to store the new information and
connect to the Wi-Fi network.
To manually scan for a Wi-Fi network:
1. Press > and tap >
Wireless & networks > Wi-Fi settings.
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery
and reduce your use times.
Note: When you select an open network, you will be
automatically connected to the network.
Note: The next time your device connects to a previously
accessed or secured wireless network, you are not
prompted to enter the wireless password again, unless
you reset your device back to its factory default settings.
SPH-D700.book Page 178 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 179
Web and Data
2. Press and tap Scan.
Wi-Fi Status Indicators
The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status
at a glance:
– Wi-Fi is connected and active.
– Wi-Fi active but there is a communication
issue with the target Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
Using the Wi-Fi Settings Menu
The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set
up many of your device’s Wi-Fi service, including:
䢇Setting your Wi-Fi sleep policy
䢇Viewing your device’s MAC Address
䢇Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1. Press > and tap >
Wireless & networks > Wi-Fi settings.
2. Press and tap Advanced.
4G Services
Understanding 4G and 3G Coverage
4G is a service that must be included in your service
plan and also available within your area. 4G coverage
is currently available in only certain markets. For more
details on 4G availability go to: www.sprint.com/4G and
click the See 4G Cities link from the bottom of the page.
Note: If 4G service is not included in your service plan, the 4G
icon will not appear in the Notifications area.
Note: 4G is up to 10x faster than 3G (based on download
speed comparison of 3G's ~600 kbps vs. 4G's ~
6 Mbps). (Actual speeds may vary.)
Sprint 4G is currently available in over 35 markets and
counting, and on select devices such as the Epic 4G.
See www.sprint.com/4G for details. Not all services are
available on 4G and coverage may default to 3G/
separate network where 4G unavailable.
SPH-D700.book Page 179 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
180 3B. Web and Data Services
Depending on which icons appear within the
Notifications area, your services and features will
change. The following table indicates what functions
and features are available when combinations of these
service icons appear:
Turning 4G On and Off
By default, your device’s 4G feature is turned off.
To turn 4G on:
1. Press > and tap >
Wireless & networks.
2. Tap the 4G field to activate the feature (checkmark
indicates active). The device scans for an available
4G network.
– or –
1. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.
Notification Icons - Usage Case (4G/3G/Data)
3G Phone Coverage Available –
Phone coverage available only, no
3G/4G data available. 4G turned Off.
3G Phone and Data Available –
Sprint 3G data and voice service is
available and active. 4G is turned
Off.
3G Available - No 4G coverage –
Sprint 3G data and voice service is
available and active. 4G is turned
On but there is no 4G coverage
(disconnected from network).
3G to 4G Transition – 3G and 4G
coverage is available. 4G service is
turned on and available in your area.
Data service is available and
switching from 3G to 4G service.
3G unavailable - 4G Available – No
3G data available. Sprint 4G is
turned on and coverage is available,
4G signal strong.
Important: 4G service must be added to your account
before attempting a connection to the 4G
network.
Notification Icons - Usage Case (4G/3G/Data)
SPH-D700.book Page 180 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 181
Web and Data
2. Tap the onscreen 4G icon to turn on the 4G
service (turns green when enabled).
To turn 4G off:
1. Press > and tap >
Wireless & networks.
2. Tap 4G to remove the green checkmark and
deactivate 4G services.
– or –
1. Touch and hold the Status bar, slide your finger
down the screen.
2. Tap the onscreen 4G icon to turn off the service
(turns gray when disabled).
Sprint Mobile Hotspot
Sprint Mobile Hotspot allows you to turn your phone
into a Wi-Fi hotspot. The feature works best when used
in conjunction with 4G data services (although 3G
service can also be used). (See “4G Services” on
page 179.)
To set up your Sprint Mobile Hotspot:
1. Press and tap > (Sprint
Hotspot).
2. Tap Sprint Hotspot and place a checkmark in the
adjacent field to activate the service.
䡲Using both 4G service and Hotspot drains your
device’s battery at a much faster rate than when
using any other feature combination.
Note: Use of 4G communication and Sprint Mobile Hot Spot
service can cause an added drain to your battery and
reduce your battery use times. Note: The best way to keep using the device as a hotspot is
to have it connected to a power supply.
SPH-D700.book Page 181 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
182 3B. Web and Data Services
To connect to the Sprint Mobile Hotspot:
1. Enable Wi-Fi (wireless) functionality on your target
device (laptop, media device, etc.).
2. Scan for Wi-Fi networks from the device and select
your Epic 4G hotspot from the network list.
䡲The default name for your Epic 4G hotspot is
SPH-D700XXX. You can change the name by
pressing
> Settings > Device name from the
Sprint Hotspot screen.
3. Select this device and follow your onscreen
instructions to enter the passkey (provided on the
Sprint Hotspot page).
4. Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an
Internet connection.
Email
Your device’s Email applications let you access and
manage multiple email accounts simultaneously in one
convenient location.
Although there is a separate Gmail application,
the main email application can manage both
Internet-based email services (Gmail™ and Yahoo™)
and Corporate Work Email (Outlook®).
The device can also be manually configured to
connect to other email systems.
If you want to send and receive email messages
through an ISP (Internet Service Provider) account
(such as Outlook), or if you wish to use your device to
access your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual
Private Network), you will first need to set up an IMAP
or POP account.
䡲IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) - This
mail retrieval protocol is frequently used in large
networks and commercial and institutional
settings. IMAP4 is the current standard.
Important: Write down the passkey (password) for this WPA
communication (shown onscreen).
Note: If you have multiple email accounts, you must configure
each account with its own settings.
SPH-D700.book Page 182 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 183
Web and Data
䡲POP (Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is
supported by most ISPs and is currently more
common among consumer applications. POP3 is
the current standard.
Email Icons/Shortcuts
– IMAP/POP3 Mail shortcut (such as Yahoo™
and Outlook™).
– Gmail shortcut
Status Bar - Notifications
– New email message received
– New Gmail message received
Google Mail (Gmail)
This email client is Google’s Web-based email service.
A Gmail/Google Mail account is created once you
sign-up for a new Google account online. (See
“Creating a Google Account” on page 55.)
䡲From a computer, launch a Web browser and
navigate to www.google.com.
Depending on your synchronization settings, Google
Mail, along with calendar events, phone numbers and
other contact information on your device are
automatically synchronized between your device and
your Gmail/Google Mail account on the Web.
Setting Up a Gmail Account via the Device
1. Press and tap > (Gmail).
2. Enter your Email address and Password.
3. Follow the onscreen prompts.
䡲The first time you connect, you are asked to give
this Internet mail account a unique onscreen
name and enter From name (displayed in your
outgoing emails within the From field).
Note: For more information, review your email carrier’s
literature or contact your IT administrator.
Note: You must have a valid and active Google account prior
to using this email client.
Important: You must log into Google after every power cycle
of your device. Logging into Gmail (via the device)
does not sign you into your Google account.
Gmail logging and access are separate from your
main Google account.
SPH-D700.book Page 183 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
184 3B. Web and Data Services
䡲The unique account name is used to differentiate
this account from other email accounts accessed
by your device.
䡲See “Adding Additional Internet Email Accounts”
on page 189.
Opening Gmail
1. Press and tap > .
2. Tap an existing email message.
To refresh your Gmail messages:
䊳Press and tap Refresh.
Create and Send Gmail
1. Press and tap > .
2. Tap Inbox to open your inbox.
3. Press and tap Compose.
4. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the
To field.
䡲If you are sending the email to several recipients,
separate the email addresses with a comma.
䡲You can add as many message recipients as you
want.
5. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
6. Tap the Compose Mail field and compose your
email.
䡲To add a picture attachment, press and tap
Attach (from the bottom of the screen).
Note: You must have a valid and active Google account
(xxxxxx@gmail.com) prior to Gmail email setup and
configuration.
Your Gmail address is then used to log into your
account via the device.
Note: Signal interruptions or incorrect username or password
information can cause completion issues. Note: To send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon copy
(Bcc) of the current email to other recipients, press
and tap Add Cc/Bcc.
SPH-D700.book Page 184 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 185
Web and Data
䡲Select the picture you want to attach (indicated by
a green checkmark) and tap OK.
䡲Tap to delete a selected attachment from
your current email.
7. Once complete, tap Send.
䡲Tap Save as draft to save the current email as a
draft. To later view your draft email messages,
from the Inbox, tap the Drafts folder.
䡲To delete the current email message, tap Discard.
Creating a Gmail Signature
1. From a computer, launch your preferred Web
browser and navigate to www.google.com.
2. From within your Gmail Settings page, navigate to
the Settings > General tab and enter your signature
into the Signature field. By default, signature is
turned off.
Accessing Email Messages
Depending on your email type, account settings, Email
notifications, ringtone notification, etc, the device
displays the email message briefly in the status bar
when you receive a new email.
A new Internet email message ( ) or Gmail
message icon appears within the Notifications
area of the Status bar to notify you of a new email.
To view a new email:
1. Press > and tap .
– or –
Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen. (See “Using the
Notifications Panel” on page 40.)
2. Tap the new email from the Notifications list to
launch the Inbox tab.
3. Scroll up and down the email by dragging your
finger up and down the screen.
SPH-D700.book Page 185 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
186 3B. Web and Data Services
To reply to an email message:
1. With the email message displayed:
䡲From within Gmail, tap the recipient name from
the To: field and select an email application to
begin replying to the sender. Choose from:
Compose (Gmail) or Email.
䡲From within Email, tap Reply or Reply all.
2. Enter a new message body and tap Send.
To delete an email message:
䊳With the email message displayed, tap Delete.
Configuring Gmail Settings
1. Press and tap > .
2. Tap Inbox to open the contents of your inbox.
3. Press and tap Settings.
Status bar
Email
Email functions
New email
Screen
message
SPH-D700.book Page 186 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 187
Web and Data
4. This menu provides both field information and
settings:
䡲Signature: Allows you to create an email signature
for your outgoing Gmail emails.
䡲Confirm delete: Shows a dialog whenever you
delete an email.
䡲Batch operations: Allows label operations.
䡲Clear search history: Removes all the searched
you have performed.
䡲Labels: Selects which labels are synchronized.
䡲Email notifications: Activates the email notification
icon to appear within the Notifications area of the
Status bar when a new Internet mail (Gmail, etc..)
is received.
䡲Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone once a
new email message is received.
䡲Vibrate: Activates a vibration once a new email
message is received.
Email
Setting Up an Email Account via the Device
1. Press and tap (Email).
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to setup an email
account.
䡲Tap Manual setup to configure your connection
settings manually (POP3 or IMAP). Follow the
onscreen prompts and enter the information
specific to your carrier.
䡲The first time you connect, you are asked to give
this Internet mail account a unique onscreen
name and enter From name (displayed in your
outgoing emails within the From field).
䡲The unique account name is used to differentiate
this account from other email accounts accessed
by your device.(See “Adding Additional Internet
Email Accounts” on page 189.)
Note: Signal interruptions or incorrect username or password
information can cause completion issues.
SPH-D700.book Page 187 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
188 3B. Web and Data Services
Opening Email
1. Press and tap (Email).
2. Press and tap Accounts.
3. Select an email account.
4. Tap an existing email message.
To refresh your Email messages:
䊳Press and tap Refresh.
Create and Send Email
1. Press and tap .
2. Press and tap Accounts.
3. Select an email account.
4. Tap Inbox to open the contents of your inbox.
5. Press and tap Compose.
6. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the
To field.
䡲If you are sending the email to several recipients,
separate the email addresses with a comma.
䡲You can add as many message recipients as you
want.
7. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
8. Tap the Compose Mail field and compose your
email.
䡲To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the
bottom of the screen).
䡲Select the picture you want to attach (indicated by
a green checkmark) and tap OK.
䡲Tap to delete a selected attachment from
your current email.
9. Once complete, tap Send.
䡲Tap > Save as draft to save the current
email as a draft. To later view your draft email
messages, from the Inbox, tap the Drafts folder.
䡲To delete the current email message, tap Discard.
Note: To send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon copy
(Bcc) of the current email to other recipients, tap the
Cc/Bcc fields.
SPH-D700.book Page 188 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 189
Web and Data
Adding Additional Internet Email Accounts
Using only reveals all currently added Email
accounts.To view additional email accounts within the
main Email screen, they must first be added.
1. Press and tap .
2. Press and tap Accounts.
3. Press and tap Add account.
4. Follow the onscreen prompts to add additional
Internet-based email accounts such as Yahoo!,
AOL, or other POP or IMAP accounts.
Configuring Email Settings
1. Press and tap .
2. Tap the email account from the Accounts area of
the Email screen.
3. Tap Inbox to open the contents of your inbox.
4. Press and tap Account settings.
5. This menu provides both field information and
settings:
䡲Account name: displays your uniquely created
account display name.
䡲Your name: displays the name used in the From
field of your outgoing emails.
䡲Email check frequency: Tap to adjust the time
interval used by your device to check your email
account for new emails.
●Options include: Never, Every 5 minutes, Every
10 minutes, Every 15 minutes, Every 30 minutes,
and Every hour.
䡲Default account: Assign this account as the default
email used for outgoing messages.
䡲Email notifications: Activates the email notification
icon to appear within the Notifications area of the
Status bar when a new Internet mail (Gmail, etc..)
is received.
䡲Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone once a
new email message is received.
䡲Vibrate: Activates a vibration once a new email
message is received.
䡲Incoming settings: Adjusts the incoming email
parameters, such as username, password, and
other incoming connection parameters (ex: IMAP
server).
SPH-D700.book Page 189 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
190 3B. Web and Data Services
䡲Outgoing settings: Adjusts the outgoing
parameters, such as username, password, and
other incoming connection parameters (ex: SMTO
server).
䡲Forward with files: Allows you to maintain any
attachments while forwarding a current email.
䡲Signature: Allows you to create an email signature
for your outgoing Gmail emails.
Corporate Email (Outlook)
The main Email application ( ) also provides
access to your Outlook Exchange server via your
device. If your company uses Microsoft Exchange
Server 2003 or 2007 as the corporate email system,
you can use this email application to wirelessly
synchronize your email, Contacts, and Task information
directly with your company’s Exchange server.
Setting Up a Corporate Email
1. Press and tap > .
2. Press and tap Accounts.
3. Press and tap Add account.
4. Enter your Email address and Password
information, and then tap Next. Consult your
Network Administrator for further details.
䡲Email address: your Outlook work email address.
䡲Password: typically your network access
password (case-sensitive).
5. Tap Exchange account (from the add new email
account screen).
6. When prompted to provide additional detailed
information, scroll down the screen and tap Next.
7. Enter a Domain\Username, Password, and
Exchange Server information.
䡲Domain\Username: Use the arrow keys to place
your cursor before your username and enter your
network domain\desktop login username.
Important: This Outlook application does not utilize
Microsoft® ActiveSync to synchronize the device
to your remote Exchange Server. This
synchronization is done wirelessly over the air
(OTA) and not via a direct connection.
SPH-D700.book Page 190 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 191
Web and Data
䡲Password: typically your network access
password (case-sensitive).
䡲Exchange Server: your exchange server remote
email address. Typically starts with mail.XXX.com.
Obtain this information from your company
network administrator. Do not accept the default
entry as this is a guess based on returned
information
䡲If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the
Use secure connection (SSL) field to place a
checkmark in the box and activate this additional
level of security.
●If your exchange server requires this feature,
leaving this field unchecked can prevent
connection.
8. Read the onscreen activation disclaimer and, if
prompted, tap Next.
9. Configure your Email check frequency, Amount to
synchronize (days to synchronize between your
device and server), and activate any other email
settings, and then tap Next.
10. Identify your new account with a unique name and
provide the outgoing name text then tap Done.
Opening Corporate Email
1. Press and tap > .
2. Tap a message to read, manage, and reply to your
email messages.
䡲From your Inbox screen, press to select
options, such as Refresh, Compose, Accounts,
Account settings, Sort, or Search.
Important: Key info here is the Domain information. Maintain
the “\” between the Domain and Username.
Note: Signal interruptions or incorrect username or password
information can cause completion issues.
Important: You can synchronize over the air (not directly) with
an Exchange Server running Microsoft Exchange
Server 2003 Service Pack 2 (SP2) or Microsoft
Exchange Server 2007.
Note: You can have multiple Work Email (Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync) accounts active on your device.
SPH-D700.book Page 191 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
192 3B. Web and Data Services
䡲While in a message, use Reply, Delete, or Reply all
or press to select messaging options, such
as Add to Contacts, Forward, Save to Calendar, or
Display Mode (Original mode or Positive mode).
Create and Send Email
1. From the Inbox, press and tap Compose.
2. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the
To field.
䡲Choose recipients from the following sources:
●Recent to access your list of recent contacts.
●Contacts to access your current Contacts
page
●Group to access any available Groups (within
which are associated Contacts entries).
●Search to search for a contact from within your
device.
䡲If you are sending the email to several recipients,
separate the email addresses with a comma.
䡲You can add as many message recipients as you
want.
3. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
4. Tap the Body field and compose your email.
䡲To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the
bottom of the screen).
䡲You can access the internal microSD card and
navigate to the file you wish to attach.
䡲Tap the file you wish to attach and tap OK.
To reply to an email message:
1. From the Inbox, tap an email message.
2. With the email message displayed, tap either Reply
or Reply all.
– or –
With the email message displayed, tap either Reply
or Reply all.
䡲If you select Forward (press ) you must
specify the message’s recipients.
Note: To send an additional carbon copy (Cc) or a blind
carbon copy (Bcc) of the current email to other
recipients, tap the Cc/Bcc fields.
SPH-D700.book Page 192 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 193
Web and Data
3. Enter a new message body and tap Send.
To delete an email message:
䊳Touch and hold an email (from your inbox list) and
select Delete from the onscreen context menu.
– or –
With the email message displayed, tap Delete.
Configuring Corporate Email Settings
After your initial setup, you are taken to the Settings
menu for your new Work Email account.
Account Settings: configures send and receive settings,
such as email signature, notifications, syncing, etc.
1. Press > and tap >
Accounts & sync.
2. Tap within the
Corporate account field to
reveal the account’s
synchronization settings
screen.
3. Toggle either the Sync
Contacts or Sync Calendar
fields to force the device
to manually resync either
the exchange Contacts or
Calendar entries.
– or –
Tap Account settings and
configure any other email
parameters you wish to
synchronize. (See
“Synchronizing Accounts” on page 73.)
To configure Corporate Email settings:
1. Press > and tap >
Accounts & sync.
2. Tap within the Corporate account field to
reveal the account’s synchronization settings
screen.
Setting Options
SPH-D700.book Page 193 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
194 3B. Web and Data Services
3. Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize.
䡲Account settings allows you to configure:
●Account name displays the name used by the
device to track the account.
●Your name displays the name used in the
From field within your outgoing emails.
●Email check frequency configures the
frequency which the device queries the
remote server for new email changes. Choose
from: Automatic (Push), Never, Every 5 minutes,
Every 10 minutes, Every 15 minutes, Every 30
minutes, or Every hour.
●Amount to synchronize to assign the sync
range for your incoming and outgoing emails
between your device and your external
exchange server. How many days worth of
emails should the device and server
synchronize. Choose from: One day, Three
days, One week, Two weeks, or One month.
●Default account assigns this account as the
default used when sending out new emails.
●Email notifications enables the device to
display a status bar icon when new
emails have been received.
●Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone
when a new or upcoming event is pending.
●Vibrate assigns a vibration when a new or
upcoming event is pending.
●Incoming settings provides access to the
Domain, password, and exchange server
parameter fields.
●Sync contacts synchronizes the contacts
between your device and the remote
exchange server. A checkmark indicates the
feature is enabled.
●Sync calendar synchronizes your exchange
calendar entries between your device and the
remote exchange server. A checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled.
●Forward with files causes any outgoing email
replay to include any currently attached files. A
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.
SPH-D700.book Page 194 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 195
Web and Data
●Signature allows you to create an outgoing
email signature attached to new emails sent
from your device.
4. Press to return to the previous screen.
For more detailed Corporate email information, see
“Corporate Email (Outlook)” on page 190. For more
information on Corporate Calendar synchronizing, see
Synchronizing Corporate Calendar Events (page 106).
To create a Corporate Email Signature:
This signature can differ from any current Email
signature on your local Outlook client. This signature is
applied to any outgoing emails originating on your
device.
1. Press > and tap >
Accounts & sync.
2. Tap within the Corporate account field to
reveal the account’s synchronization settings
screen.
3. Scroll to the bottom of the list and tap Signature.
4. Delete the current default text and enter your new
email signature.
5. Tap OK to store the new signature.
Configuring Data Synchronization Settings
This feature allows you to determine which current
applications are synchronized with external server and
at what intervals.
1. Press > and tap >
Accounts & sync. These settings can affect data
minute usage, please refer to your current data
plan for more details.
2. Tap any of the following options:
䡲Background data: Allows data synchronization to
occur as a background function. It allows this to
occur behind the scenes and does not affect any
current use of the device.
䡲Auto-sync: Requires the device to maintain
synchronization with the remote server providing
data to your selected applications.
3. Press to store your changes and return to
the Home screen.
SPH-D700.book Page 195 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
196 3B. Web and Data Services
Using the Android Market
The Android Market provides direct access to a large
selection of applications which you can download and
install on your device.
Accessing the Market
1. Press and tap (Market).
2. If not already logged in with your Google account,
tap Next.
3. Tap Sign in and enter your Google account
information.
4. Touch Accept to agree to the Android Market terms
of service.
Selecting and Installing a Google Application
1. Press and tap .
2. Browse through the categories, find an application
you're interested in, and tap the name.
3. Read the application descriptions.
4. Tap Install.
5. If prompted, follow the onscreen instructions to pay
for the application.
6. Check the progress of the current download by
opening the Notifications panel.
7. After the item is downloaded and installed on your
device, the content download icon appears in
the notification area of the status bar.
8. On the Android Market screen, tap Downloads, tap
the installed application in the list, and then tap
Open.
Launching an Installed Google Application
1. Press and tap .
2. Tap the newly installed application.
Note: Use caution with applications which request access to
any personal data, functions, or significant amounts of
data usage times.
Tip: You can also access recent apps from the Google
Market. Tap [ > Downloads and tap the application.
SPH-D700.book Page 196 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 197
Web and Data
Reinstalling a Google Application
If the Android operating system is ever updated, any
data contained on the device will be erased. The only
data stored on the device are Google applications
available via the Android Market.
1. Log into your Google account via the device.
2. Press and tap > Downloads.
3. Scroll through the list of previously downloaded
Google applications and choose the one you wish
to reinstall.
4. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Applications
You can access a wide variety of applications in many
different categories with your phone and data service.
Your phone comes preloaded with links to the
following applications:
䢇Google
䢇NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile
䢇Sprint Football Live
䢇Sprint Zone
䢇Sprint Mobile Hotspot (see page 181)
䢇Qik
To get started with applications:
1. Press and tap > (NASCAR
Sprint Cup Mobile). (The browser will start and take
you to the download menu for the application.)
2. Follow the instructions to customize your
application (such as selecting a favorite team or
driver) or press to explore your options.
Note: Pictures and music are stored on the microSD card.
Contacts and Calendars are stored remotely on with
your remote Google or Outlook servers.
Important Privacy Message – Sprint’s policies often do not
apply to third-party applications. Third-party applications may
access your personal information or require Sprint to disclose
your customer information to the third-party application
provider. To find out how a third-party application will collect,
access, use, or disclose your personal information, check the
application provider’s policies, which can usually be found on
their website. If you aren’t comfortable with the third-party
application’s policies, don’t use the application.
SPH-D700.book Page 197 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
198 3B. Web and Data Services
NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile
Now you have the ability to get every bit of NASCAR
coverage, news, and stats right on your device.
1. Press and tap > (NASCAR
Sprint Cup Mobile).
2. If prompted, read the permission check disclaimer,
make a selection and tap OK. Follow the onscreen
instructions until you reach the main NASCAR
Sprint Cup Mobile page.
3. Navigate the main page by scrolling around using
the touchscreen.
4. Tap an onscreen option to activate features that
include:
䡲Home is the main NASCAR homepage where you
can view stats on a current race, choose to follow
a specific driver, view special NASCAR
promotions and other NASCAR-specific
multimedia content.
●Press and tap Home to return to the
main NASCAR page. This applies to each of
these options.
䡲Leaderboard launches a an onscreen board
showing the ranking of leaders in the competition.
䡲Race Recap provides overviews of the current
races, pictures, commentary, additional photos,
and race stats.
䡲SPEED displays a list of selectable multimedia
video clips from the SPEED channel that are
specific to NASCAR.
䡲Point Standings displays race stats, driver info,
news, photos, etc. for the All-Star race.
䡲My Driver to customize your NASCAR experience
by following specific drivers. Information includes
driver-specific stats and NASCAR RSS feeds. You
can also get additional stats, review other driver
info, or change drivers.
䡲Stats/Sched lets you track race information such
as: NSCS Recap, NNS Recap, Point Standings,
Season Stats, and Schedule.
Note: Some Sprint data applications may not work with a
Wi-Fi connection present. If prompted, disable your
device's Wi-Fi feature while using these applications.
SPH-D700.book Page 198 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 199
Web and Data
䡲Miss Sprint Cup is your insider to NASCAR by
providing news, information, blogs and twitter
updates to the goings-on within NASCAR.
䡲Videos displays a list of selectable multimedia
content. Other features include streaming
multimedia content from NASCAR radio stations
or other racing radio shows.
䡲News & Alerts provides you with quick access to
NASCAR-specific news, photos, and driver stats.
You can also customize alerts for new information
such as ALL NASCAR News, Sprint Cup News,
etc.
䡲Community lets you take part in online fantasy
racing, access Games, News, Videos, take part in
Polls, and access other Special Promotions.
䡲Fantasy lets you connect with other NASCAR
enthusiasts. You will have to login using a
NASCAR.COM Community login. If you do not
have this information, visit community.nascar.com to
get an account.
䡲FanZone displays a list of selectable content
available to Sprint subscribers such as
Sweepstakes, Video clips (footage and music)
and Screensavers.
䡲Settings and Help displays help information for
usage of the NASCAR application and features.
䡲Exit to quit the NASCAR application.
●Press and tap Exit.
Sprint Football Live
Get the Football live on your phone. It lets you be right
in the middle of your favorite game by being a part of
previews, blogs, discussions groups, fantasy football,
etc.
1. Press and tap > (Sprint Football
Live).
2. Tap Continue and follow the onscreen instructions
to customize your football experience by choosing
your favorite team.
3. Access any of the following features by pressing
(menu):
Note: Use the directional keys to move around the
application’s menu features.
SPH-D700.book Page 199 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
200 3B. Web and Data Services
䡲2010 Draft (default home page) displays a screen
full of draft information such as Draft Insider,
Exclusive Blog, Draft Tracker, Pick’Em, Mock Draft,
and Draft Prospects.
䡲Favorite Team launches a team-specific page with
content such as top stories, RSS feeds, Rumor
information, Schedules, Team Alerts, and the
ability to change your favorite team selection.
䡲News provides AP league news, Rumor and
News, PFTV, Injury Info, Transactions, Legal, and
other football related information, photos and
videos.
䡲Tweets launches an onscreen Twitter page
specific to the NFL. Also included onscreen is a
real-time RSS new feed.
䡲Team Pages allows you select from wither the AFC
or NFC conferences, and then display content
such as top stories, RSS feeds, Rumor
information, Schedules, Team Alerts, and the
ability to change your favorite team selection.
䡲Help/About displays help information for Sprint
Football Live topics such as: General, Home,
News, Twitter, Team Page, About, or Alerts.
䡲Exit allows you to exit the Sprint Football Live
application. Tap YES to exit.
Sprint Zone
A free application that lets you stay connected to all the
latest news and information from Sprint. Included here
are Sprint customer promotions, news, feedback,
featured apps, and tips/tricks for your device.
1. Press and tap (SprintZone).
2. Navigate through the list to find your relevant
topics.
3. Tap a topic link to continue to that page.
Qik
Qik is a mobile video sharing service that lets you
record and share experiences with your friends, family,
and your favorite social networks.
1. Press and tap > (Qik) > Sign in.
Note: If you do not already have a Qik account, touch Create
and follow the onscreen prompts to create your new
account.
SPH-D700.book Page 200 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3B. Web and Data Services 201
Web and Data
2. Touch the Username and Password fields and
enter your information.
3. Tap Sign in. Your device
then communicates with
the Qik servers to confirm
your information.
4. Follow the onscreen
instructions. For more
information, visit:
http://qik.com/.
Configure Front Facing
Camera
1. Press > Settings >
Camera.
2. Tap Front to enable the
front facing camera lens (to the upper-right of the
screen).
Recording Video
1. Tap Record from the main Qik menu (shown
above).
2. Tap to begin recording.
3. Tap to stop recording.
4. Enter a title for your video segment and select
those services you wish to use to distribute your
video.
䡲Services such as Twitter, Facebook, SMS, and
E-mail ask that you select a recipient for your
video segment.
SPH-D700.book Page 201 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
202 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
⽧DivX (page 202)
⽧Sprint TV (page 205)
⽧Music (page 205)
⽧Streaming Music (page 208)
⽧YouTube (page 208)
⽧AllShare (page 209)
Sprint TV gives you the ability to listen to audio clips
and to view video clips right from your device’s display.
Watch live TV and catch up on episodes of your
favorite shows – anywhere on the Nationwide Sprint
Network.*
* Sprint TV coverage not available everywhere. Content and
lineup subject to change. Select channels also available
for casual usage. Visit www.sprint.com/tvguide for more
information.
Amazon MP3 lets you preview, purchase, download,
and listen to over a million songs right on your device.
You can even add songs from your own library to
round out your on-the-go playlist.
DivX
The Epic 4G recognizes DivX®
encoded media files.
Devices certified to play DivX
video:
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a
digital video format created by
DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that
plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more
information and software tools to convert your files into
DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX® Certified
device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-
on-Demand (VOD) content. DivX Certified® to play
DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.
To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD
section in the device setup menu.
Note: The best recording setting for MP4 video playback on
this device is H.264 for Android™ or PSP™.
3C. Entertainment:
TV and Music
SPH-D700.book Page 202 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music 203
TV and Music
Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the
registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.
[Important: DivX VOD content is protected by a DivX
DRM (Digital Rights Management) system that restricts
playback to only registered DivX Certified devices.
If you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for
your device, the message "Authorization Error" will be
displayed and your content will not play.] Learn more at
www.divx.com/vod.
Locating Your VOD Registration Number
1. Press > and tap >
About phone > Legal information > License settings
> DivX® VOD > Register.
2. Write down your Registration code.
3. Tap OK.
Register your DivX Device for VOD
Playback of Purchased Movies
To play purchased DivX
movies on your Samsung
Epic device, you will first
need to complete a
one-time registration using
both your device and your
computer.
1. Write down the DivX
registration code that
appears onscreen.
Copy this 8 or 10-digit
number down.
2. Verify you have the
latest DivX software
running on your
computer. Download
the free player (for your
computer) from
www.divx.com.
Note: DivX VOD content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital
Rights Management) system that restricts playback to
only registered DivX Certified devices.
Note: Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,688; 7,519,274
SPH-D700.book Page 203 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
204 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
3. Open the DivX Player on your computer and from
within the VOD menu, select Register a DivX
Certified Device...
䡲You are prompted to log in or create a DivX
account if your account information has not
already been saved in DivX Player.
4. Follow the instructions in DivX Player to enter the
registration code from step 2 and create a device
nickname (ex: "Pat or D700").
5. Choose a location on your computer to download
the DivX registration video with the same title as
your device nickname (ex: Pat.divx).
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to download the
file and initiate the transfer process.
7. Connect your Samsung Epic to the computer via
USB and transfer this video. (See “Connecting
Your Device to Your Computer” on page 125.)
8. From the Registration screen (Transfer), select USB
(the device) as the target destination for the
registration video (created in step 6) and click
Start.
9. Press and tap > (My Files).
(See “My Files” on page 112.)
10. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate
your registration DivX video file.
11. Tap the file to play it. Once you play the registration
file on your device, your registration is complete!
Return to the Divx VOD Manager screen (from within
your computer’s DivX Player) and confirm both your
computer and your new device appears in the list of
registered DivX devices.
Playback Media Files
1. Press and tap > (My Files).
2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate
your selected file.
3. Tap the desired movie or music file.
Note: There is no special registration or configuration
necessary to playback DRM-free DivX movies.
Registration of your device is only required for playback
of protected DivX material.
SPH-D700.book Page 204 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music 205
TV and Music
Sprint TV
Your Sprint TV Channel Options
The Sprint TV application offers a wide variety of
accessible channels. Subscription options include
comprehensive basic packages as well as a full menu
of “a la carte” channels. Visit www.sprint.com/tvguide for
more information on channels and pricing.
Watching TV
1. Press and tap > (SprintTV).
Depending on your settings, your device may
prompt you to accept a data connection.
2. Select TV, Radio, Favs, or More to display channel
options.
3. Tap an entry to select a channel from the Sprint TV
listings or to select an available category.
4. Tap a desired clip to view the program. The clip will
automatically load and begin playing.
Music
The Amazon MP3 store lets you purchase and
download digital music files to play on your device or
computer. (You must have an amazon.com account to
purchase and download music from Amazon MP3.)
Note: Available categories and content are subject to change.
Note: SprintTV can only be viewed over a cellular connection.
Turn off your Wi-Fi communication prior to using this
application. If prompted, tap Disable Wi-Fi to continue.
Note: The first time you access a channel, the system will
prompt you to purchase access (unless the channel
doesn't have a monthly fee). Tap Subscribe to
purchase access, or tap Preview to view a preview of
the selected channel.
Tip: Scroll through the channels to view more selections.
Once you find a channel that you want to watch or listen
to, simply touch it and wait approximately three seconds,
and the channel begins loading.
SPH-D700.book Page 205 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
206 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
Purchasing and Downloading Music from
Amazon
1. Press and tap > (Amazon MP3).
2. Select an onscreen category (Bestselling Albums,
Bestselling Songs, Browse By Genre, or Search).
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to locate the
desired track or album.
4. Tap the song title to listen to an audio preview.
Tap the song title again to stop playback.
䡲Preview allows you to play an audio clip of the
selected song.
5. Once you have located a desired song title or
album, tap [price] > Buy.
䡲Pressing BUY allows you to purchase the song
and download it to your device’s microSD card.
●When you select Buy, you will need to log into
your Amazon account. (If there is no microSD
card installed or if there is not enough free
memory space on the card, you will see an
alert.)
●Once the song has been downloaded to your
microSD card, you can use the Music
application to playback the file.
Accessing the Music Player
1. Press and tap > (Music).
2. From the Music display, select an option:
䡲Artists to display your current local music files
sorted by artist.
䡲Albums to display your current local music files
sorted by album.
䡲Songs to browse through all of your downloaded
music and any additional songs you have loaded
onto your microSD card from your computer.
䡲Playlists to select a customized playlist you’ve
created to organize your music.
3. Once you’ve displayed a list of songs, you can
browse through your available titles.
䡲To play a song, tap it to display the title and track
information.
䡲To listen to a song or playlist, tap it to begin
playing from the selected song. (You can also
highlight the playlist to begin listening.)
MP3
SPH-D700.book Page 206 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music 207
TV and Music
Creating a Playlist
1. Press and tap > > Songs. Your
device searches through your device and microSD
card for compatible music files and then displays
them onscreen.
2. Touch and hold a song you’d like to add to a
playlist. This action reveals an onscreen context
menu.
3. Tap Add to playlist and select either a Current
playlist or select New (to create a new playlist).
䡲If you select New, delete the current default name,
enter a name for your new playlist, and tap Save.
Assigning a Song as a Ringtone
1. Press and tap > > Songs.
2. Touch and hold a song you’d like to use as your
new ringtone. This action reveals an onscreen
popup menu.
3. Tap Use as phone ringtone to store the selected
song as your new default ringtone.
4. Confirm the song has been successfully assigned
by navigating to your Phone ringtone menu.
䡲Press > and tap > Sound &
display > Phone ringtone.
5. Confirm the new song is selected.
Backing Up Your Downloaded Music Files
Sprint recommends you back up your downloaded
music files to your computer. (See “Connecting Your
Device to Your Computer” on page 125.)
1. Connect your phone using a USB cable or the
built-in connection on Bluetooth-enabled phones.
2. Use your computer to navigate to the microSD
card’s Music folder.
3. Select and copy the music files to a folder on your
computer’s hard drive.
SPH-D700.book Page 207 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
208 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
Streaming Music
Sprint offers a variety of musical options through the
Radio category in the Sprint TV menu, including
SIRIUS Music, Music Choice, VH1, and many others.
Choose from rock, pop, hip-hop, and R&B, and access
exclusive video clips, music industry news,
performances, and interviews with your favorite artists.
1. Press and tap > > Radio >
[selection].
2. Select Preview to see and hear a preview of your
selected channel (if available).
– or –
Select Subscribe to purchase a monthly
subscription to your selected channel.
Once you have purchased access to a music or radio
channel, you can select from a variety of stations to
listen to your favorite music or get caught up on what’s
new in music.
YouTube
YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users
can upload and share videos. The site is used to
display a wide variety of user-generated video content,
including movie clips, TV clips, and music videos, as
well as video content such as video blogging,
informational shorts and other original videos.
1. Press and tap (YouTube).
2. Read the disclaimer regarding data usage and
touch Continue.
3. Press to open the onscreen keyboard, or
open the Qwerty keyboard and tap the Search field
to search for specific videos, scroll down to browse
through the main page thumbnails, or scroll to the
bottom to explore additional options.
4. To view a video, touch an available preview
thumbnail or touch the title link.
5. Press to return to the previous page.
Note: YouTube is a data-intensive feature. Sprint recommends
that you upgrade to an unlimited data plan to avoid
additional data charges.
SPH-D700.book Page 208 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music 209
TV and Music
AllShare
Allows users to share their in-device media content
with other external devices using DLNA certified™
(Digital Living Network Alliance) Devices. These
external devices must also be DLNA-compliant.
Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a device
like the WMG-160 HD Digital Multimedia Streamer.
The application contains three separate streaming
media options:
䡲Play file from my phone on another player allows
you to play local device content on a Wi-Fi
capable TV or playback device. The Epic 4G can
then be used as a remote to control playback.
䡲Play file from server on my phone allows you to
receive and playback media stored externally
(server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device.
䡲Play file from server on another player via my phone
allows you to “piggy-back” content playback on
an external Wi-Fi TV/receiver. Your Epic 4G
retrieves content from an external wireless source
(eg., server) and pushes it through to an external
wireless destination (eg., TV). The Epic 4G acts to
both route the media and control its playback (as
a remote).
Configure the AllShare Settings
The AllShare™ application must first be configured
prior to its initial use. You must setup parameters such
as connected Wi-FI, Items to share, source server
address, and external device acceptance rights.
1. Press and tap > (AllShare).
2. Tap Settings and configure the following settings
as desired:
䡲Media server name allows you to enter the name
of the server transmitting the media files. Eg.,
MyServer. Once you enter the name tap Save.
Note: It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view
content. However, if you wish to sign in to access
additional options, access the page via the Web
browser and tap Sign in at the top right corner, enter
your YouTube or Google username and password, and
tap Sign in.
Note: Wi-Fi will need to be enabled and active on your Epic
4G to use this feature.
SPH-D700.book Page 209 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
210 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
䡲Share media to configure which media types will
be shared. Choose from Share video, Share image,
or Share sound.
䡲Access point network allows you to turn on your
Wi-Fi functionality and connect to an available
Wi-Fi Access Point.
䡲Upload from other devices allows you to setup an
acceptance rule of incoming media from other
external devices. Choose from Always accept,
Always ask, or Always reject and tap OK.
3. Press to return to the previous page.
Selecting the Media You will Transmit
1. Press and tap > .
2. Tap adjacent to one of the selected
transmission methods. (This procedure assumes
selection of the first option).
3. If transmitting local media to an external device,
scroll through your microSD card folders to locate
the file(s) you wish to transmit. A green checkmark
indicates the file has been selected.
4. Tap Add to playlist. The Epic 4G then begins to
search to compatible Wi-Fi devices.
5. Tap a destination device from the onscreen list. If
you desired device does not appear, tap Refresh.
Receiving Media From a Server
1. Press and tap > .
2. Tap adjacent to one of the selected
transmission methods. (This procedure assumes
selection of the second option.)
3. Tap a source media server from the onscreen list. If
you server does not appear, tap Refresh.
Note: It is recommended that if you are not already
communicating with an external WAP, you configure
those settings here first.
SPH-D700.book Page 210 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3D. GPS Navigation 211
GPS Navigation
⽧GPS Services (page 211)
⽧Google Maps (page 211)
⽧Sprint Navigation (page 213)
⽧Getting Driving Directions (page 214)
GPS Services
Your device’s built-in GPS capability gives you access
to a number of location-based services, including
Google Maps and Sprint Navigation.
Activating Location Mode
Before using any of the location-based services, you
must turn on your device’s location mode.
䊳Press > and tap > Location &
security > Use GPS satellites.
Activating Using Wireless Networks
This additional location feature uses open Wi-Fi and
mobile network connections to assist in providing
additional location accuracy.
1. Press > and tap > Location &
security > Use wireless networks.
䡲Since this feature is based on Google’s location
service, you will need to agree to allow Google to
collect anonymous information.
2. Tap Agree to accept the terms of service.
Google Maps
Use this application to find directions, location
information, business addresses, etc., all right from your
Epic 4G. Determine your current location with or
without GPS, get driving and transit directions and get
phone numbers and addresses for local businesses.
3D. GPS Navigation
Note: Enabling the GPS hardware can drain your battery
faster.
SPH-D700.book Page 211 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
212 3D. GPS Navigation
Before you begin using this feature you must activate
your GPS hardware and agree to share location
information with Google.
To enable your device’s GPS Location feature:
1. Press > and tap > Location &
security.
2. Tap Use GPS satellites. A green checkmark
indicates the GPS location feature is enabled.
(For additional location information, see “Location
Settings” on page 72.)
䡲 appears in the Notification area when the
GPS is active.
䡲 appears in the Notification area when the
GPS is communicating.
To launch the Google Maps application:
䊳Press and tap > (Maps).
To use Google Maps:
1. Press and tap
> .
䡲If prompted, read the
What’s new message
and tap OK.
2. Tap the magnification
icons to zoom in or out of
the current map view.
– or –
Press to use other
Google Map features.
䡲Choose from: Search, Directions, Layers,
My Location, Join Latitude, and More.
To search for a keyword:
1. Press and tap > .
2. Press and tap Search.
SPH-D700.book Page 212 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3D. GPS Navigation 213
GPS Navigation
3. Tap the search field (at the top of the screen), enter
a keyword, and tap .
䡲This keyword can be a category name (such as
pizza, steak, burger), a business name (Samsung,
Sprint), or a Google friend who is sharing their
location.
4. Tap (bottom left) to reveal a detailed list of
information corresponding to those matches now
displayed on your screen with lettered pins.
Sprint Navigation
Sprint Navigation gives you turn-by-turn directions
onscreen and over speakerphone.
Registering Sprint Navigation
Before you can use Sprint Navigation, your device and
service must be registered.
1. Press and tap > (Sprint
Navigation).
2. Read the disclaimer and touch Accept to
acknowledge the terms of use.
3. Tap each of the onscreen registration fields and
enter the required information.
䡲First Name, Last Name, and Email (optional).
䡲If using the onscreen keyboard, tap Next to store
your information.
4. Tap Continue to register your information.
5. Tap Yes to take a brief tour of the Navigation
features and functionality, or No, Skip Tour to
continue to the main navigation screen.
Note: Depending on your service plan, Sprint Navigation may
require a monthly subscription. Contact Sprint for
information and pricing.
Note: Some features may be available only with a
subscription to Sprint Navigation Premium.
SPH-D700.book Page 213 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
214 3D. GPS Navigation
Using Sprint Navigation
Before you can use Sprint Navigation, your device and
service must be registered.
1. Press and tap > .
2. Select an option and follow the onscreen
instructions to take advantage of Sprint
Navigation’s full suite of features.
䡲Drive To lets you get driving directions from
wherever you are to wherever you’re going.
Choices include:
●My Favorites: user-defined favorite locations.
●Recent Places: recently entered locations.
●Address: manually entered street addresses.
●Intersection: map based on manually a
entered street intersection.
●City: display a city map based on selected city.
●Business: locations based on business
categories.
●Airports: local airports based on current GPS
location.
●Contacts: those local addresses assigned to
previously entered Contacts.
䡲Search lets you search for locations from dozens
of options such as Food/Coffee, Gas Stations, Gas
by Price, Banks/ATMs, WiFi Spots, Parking Lots,
Hotels & Motels, Movie Theaters, etc.
䡲Maps & Traffic provides access to a 2D map of
your current location, access to real-time traffic
information, and other additional features.
䡲Share & More offers additional options, such as
sharing your location with contacts, creating and
storing My Favorites locations, accessing the
product tour, looking for movies and movie
theaters, and setting detailed application
preferences.
Getting Driving Directions
The built-in GPS hardware (when enabled) allows you
to get driving directions to selected locations or
establishments based on your current location.
Note: For more information about Sprint Navigation, visit
www.sprint.com/navigation.
SPH-D700.book Page 214 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3D. GPS Navigation 215
GPS Navigation
Using a Physical Address
Before you can use Sprint Navigation, your device and
service must be registered.
1. Press and tap > > Drive To >
Address.
2. Tap Type It to manually enter the new address and
receive driving directions from the GPS network.
– or –
Tap Speak It to place a call to the TeleNav™
operator where you will speak the desired address.
This is similar to calling 411 for directory
assistance. (A fee may be incurred.)
3. Tap Address and then enter information (Address,
City, State/ZIP, and Country) into any of the address
fields.
4. Tap Done > Get Route to initiate your search. If
prompted to select from a list of matches, tap the
correct address.
5. Follow both the onscreen and audio directions.
After you enter the location and receive driving
directions, you can alter the information being
displayed by using one of three other driving options:
Traffic, Summary, and Search.
Distance to next turn
Magnifications
No GPS
Scale
Current Street
Your location
3D map
signal
location
SPH-D700.book Page 215 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
216 3D. GPS Navigation
To receive turn by turn directions (2D):
1. Press and tap > > Drive To >
Address.
2. Tap Type It, enter the physical address information,
and tap Done.
3. Press and tap Summary to receive a
detailed turn by turn description for navigating to
your desired location.
To search nearby locations based on type:
1. Press and tap > > Drive To >
Address.
2. Tap Type It, enter the physical address information,
and tap Done.
3. Press and tap Search to search for a
location based on a category such as Food/
Coffee, etc.
Using a Local Business Category
The Epic 4G can also cross-reference your current
location with local business and points of interest, such
as Grocery Stores, Gas Stations, Wi-Fi Spots, Malls,
Hospitals, etc.
1. Press and tap > > Drive To >
Businesses.
2. Tap Type It, enter the physical address information,
and tap Done.
3. Tap the Category field and then choose from one
of the available category entries by touching an
onscreen entry such as: Food/Coffee, Gas Stations,
Gas by Price, Banks/ATMs, WiFi Spots, Hospitals,
etc..
– or –
Enter a keyword into the Where field to begin
retrieving matches. Once you see a matching
business name, touch the entry.
●Entries with more than one available category
(a subcategory) appear with an adjacent gray
arrow. These entries can be expanded and
then closed.
Note: A 2D map is a flat representation f your projected
driving directions. A 3D map represents the driving
directions with a representation of depth.
SPH-D700.book Page 216 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3D. GPS Navigation 217
GPS Navigation
4. Tap Search to store your information and begin the
search.
5. Tap a matching entry based on star ratings and
distances.
To search for the nearest gas station in your area:
1. Press and tap > > Drive To >
Businesses > Category > Gas Stations.
2. Tap Search to begin the search.
3. Touch an entry from the list to display a new route
to the selected gas station.
Creating a My Favorites
Location
Once you have begun using
Sprint Navigation to find your
destination, you can then either
recall those locations and add
them to your list of favorite
destinations or create a new
entry from one of the available
location categories (Address,
Business, Airport, or Contacts).
To create a My Favorites location from a Recent Place:
1. Press and tap > > Drive To >
Recent Places.
2. Use the directional arrow keys to highlight a recent
place from the list.
3. Press and tap Save as Favorite.
䡲Save as Favorite: to save the current location to
your My Favorites list.
Sharing a Recent Location with Others
Recently queried locations can be saved to your My
Favorites list and also shared with other cellular
devices.
1. Press and tap > > Drive To >
Recent Places.
2. Use the directional arrow keys to highlight a recent
place from the list.
3. Press and tap Share Address.
4. Tap the Send To: field and then enter a mobile
number or email address.
SPH-D700.book Page 217 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
218 3D. GPS Navigation
5. Tap Send Now to complete the delivery process.
Configuring Your Navigation Preferences
1. Press and tap > >
Share & More > Preferences.
2. Touch an entry to change its current setting:
䡲General: allows change general settings,
including:
●First Name/Last Name: allows you to alter the
current first and last name registered with the
service, as well as email address.
●Email: allows you to create an associated
email account for this application.
●Region: allows you to assign a current region.
Default is North America.
●Language: allows you to assign a current
language. Default is English(US).
●Distance Units: allows you to alter the
descriptions used for distances: Km/Meters or
Mi/Ft.
●Tips: allows you to display onscreen tips:
Always On or Always Off.
●Connection: allows you to assign the GPS
connection method: BIS, MDS(BES), or TCP.
Default is BIS.
●GPS Source: allows you to assign a current
GPS connection source. Default is Internal.
●Exit after (minutes): assigns the default
application timeout. This is the timeout interval
when no activity is detected: Never, 5, 10, 20,
or 30.
●Init Volume: allows you to alter the initial
volume level for the readouts: Very Soft, Soft,
Normal, Loud, or Very Loud.
●Map Colors: allows you to alter the
appearance of the onscreen map: Daytime,
Nightime, or Auto.
Note: It is recommended you do not alter the Connection
method unless there is an functional issue with the
application.
SPH-D700.book Page 218 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
3D. GPS Navigation 219
GPS Navigation
䡲Navigation: lets you change navigation settings,
including:
●Route Style: allows you to choose the method
which is used to provide you directions from
Point A to Point B. The default is Always use
fastest.
●Avoid: allows you to setup obstacles that
should be avoided when determining travel
routes: HOV Lanes, Tools, and Traffic Delays.
Tap Done to set these parameters.
●Moving Maps: allows you to setup a preferred
traffic display view: 2D Maps or 3D Maps
(default).
●Backlight: allows you to assign the backlight
settings: On, Off, or On at Turns.
●Traffic Alerts: allows you to setup a traffic alert
notification when these appear on your
current travel route. Choose from On or Off.
䡲Navigation Audio: lets you change the audio read
out given during your navigation session:
●Settings: allows you to setup the level of detail
used for the directions when spoken: Full
Audio, Instructions Only, or No Audio.
●Language: allows you to select the language
used for the directions when spoken: Sara
(English US) (default) or Maria (Spanish).
●During Phone Call: allows you to setup if
directions are spoken during a phone call:
Suspend (default) or Play.
Launching the Product Tour
1. Press and tap > >
Share & More > Product Tour.
SPH-D700.book Page 219 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
SPH-D700.book Page 220 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Section 4
Safety and Warranty
Information
SPH-D700.book Page 221 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
222 4A. Important Safety Information
⽧General Precautions (page 222)
⽧Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Phone
(page 223)
⽧Caring for the Battery (page 224)
⽧Radio Frequency (RF) Energy (page 225)
⽧Owner’s Record (page 227)
⽧User Guide Proprietary Notice (page 228)
This phone guide contains important operational and
safety information that will help you safely use your
phone. Failure to read and follow the information
provided in this phone guide may result in serious
bodily injury, death, or property damage.
General Precautions
There are several simple guidelines to operating your phone
properly and maintaining safe, satisfactory service.
䢇To maximize performance, do not touch the bottom portion
of your phone where the internal antenna is located while
using the phone.
䢇Speak directly into the mouthpiece.
䢇Avoid exposing your phone and accessories to rain or liquid
spills. If your phone does get wet, immediately turn the
power off and remove the battery.
䢇Do not expose your phone to direct sunlight for extended
periods of time (such as on the dashboard of a car).
䢇Although your phone is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of
equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting,
bending, or sitting on it.
䢇Any changes or modifications to your phone not expressly
approved in this document could void your warranty for this
equipment and void your authority to operate this
equipment.
4A. Important Safety
Information
Note: For the best care of your phone, only Sprint-authorized
personnel should service your phone and accessories. Failure
to do so may be dangerous and void your warranty.
SPH-D700.book Page 222 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
4A. Important Safety Information 223
Important Safety Information
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access
to Your Phone
Do Not Rely on Your Phone for Emergency Calls
Mobile phones operate using radio signals, which cannot
guarantee connection in all conditions. Therefore you should
never rely solely upon any mobile phone for essential
communication (e.g., medical emergencies). Emergency calls
may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain
network services or mobile phone features are in use. Check
with your local service provider for details.
Using Your Phone While Driving
Talking on your phone while driving (or operating the phone
without a hands-free device) is prohibited in some jurisdictions.
Laws vary as to specific restrictions. Remember that safety
always comes first.
Following Safety Guidelines
To operate your phone safely and efficiently, always follow any
special regulations in a given area. Turn your phone off in areas
where use is forbidden or when it may cause interference or
danger.
Using Your Phone Near Other Electronic Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio
frequency (RF) signals. However, RF signals from wireless
phones may affect inadequately shielded electronic
equipment.
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately
shielded electronic operating systems or entertainment
systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or their
representative to determine if these systems are adequately
shielded from external RF signals. Also check with the
manufacturer regarding any equipment that has been added to
your vehicle.
Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices,
such as pacemakers and hearing aids, to determine if they are
adequately shielded from external RF signals.
Turning Off Your Phone Before Flying
Turn off your phone before boarding any aircraft. To prevent
possible interference with aircraft systems, the U.S. Federal
Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations require you to have
permission from a crew member to use your phone while
the plane is on the ground. To prevent any risk of interference,
FCC regulations prohibit using your phone while the plane is in
the air.
Tip: Purchase an optional hands-free accessory at your local Sprint
Store, or call Sprint at 1-866-866-7509. You can also dial # 2 2 2
on your phone.
Note: Always turn off the phone in healthcare facilities, and request
permission before using the phone near medical equipment.
SPH-D700.book Page 223 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
224 4A. Important Safety Information
Turning Off Your Phone in Dangerous Areas
To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your phone
off when in a blasting area or in other areas with signs
indicating two-way radios should be turned off. Construction
crews often use remote-control RF devices to set off explosives.
Turn your phone off when you’re in any area that has a
potentially explosive atmosphere. Although it’s rare, your phone
and accessories could generate sparks. Sparks can cause an
explosion or fire, resulting in bodily injury or even death. These
areas are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include:
䡲Fueling areas such as gas stations.
䡲Below deck on boats.
䡲Fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities.
䡲Areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such
as grain, dust, or metal powders.
䡲Any other area where you would normally be advised to
turn off your vehicle’s engine.
Restricting Children’s Access to Your Phone
Your phone is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as
they could hurt themselves and others, damage the phone or
make calls that increase your Sprint invoice.
Please Note the Following Information When Using Your
Handset
1. WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
䡲The display on your handset is made of glass or acrylic
and could break if your handset is dropped or if it
receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is broken
or cracked as this could cause injury to you.
2. WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A
TOUCHSCREEN HANDSET
䡲If your handset has a touchscreen display, please note
that a touchscreen responds best to a light touch from
the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using
excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the
touchscreen may damage the tempered glass surface
and void the warranty. For more information, please refer
to the “4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty” on page 229.
Caring for the Battery
Protecting Your Battery
The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your
battery’s performance.
䢇Recently there have been some public reports of wireless
phone batteries overheating, catching fire, or exploding. It
appears that many, if not all, of these reports involve
counterfeit or inexpensive, aftermarket-brand batteries with
unknown or questionable manufacturing standards. Sprint is
Note: Never transport or store flammable gas, flammable liquids, or
explosives in the compartment of your vehicle that contains
your phone or accessories.
SPH-D700.book Page 224 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
4A. Important Safety Information 225
Important Safety Information
not aware of similar problems with Sprint phones resulting
from the proper use of batteries and accessories approved
by Sprint or the manufacturer of your phone. Use only Sprint-
approved or manufacturer-approved batteries and
accessories found at Sprint Stores or through your phone’s
manufacturer, or call 1-866-866-7509 to order. They’re also
available at www.sprint.com — click Accessories. Buying the
right batteries and accessories is the best way to ensure
they’re genuine and safe.
䢇In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in
temperatures that range from 32° F to 113° F (0° C to 45° C).
䢇Don’t use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high
humidity areas, such as the bathroom.
䢇Never dispose of the battery by incineration.
䢇Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean.
䢇Don’t attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery.
䢇The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for
a long period of time.
䢇It’s best to replace the battery when it no longer provides
acceptable performance. It can be recharged hundreds of
times before it needs replacing.
䢇Don’t store the battery in high temperature areas for long
periods of time. It’s best to follow these storage rules:
䡲Less than one month:
-4° F to 140° F (-20° C to 60° C)
䡲More than one month:
-4° F to 113° F (-20° C to 45° C)
Disposal of Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) Batteries
Do not handle a damaged or leaking Li-Ion battery as you can
be burned.
For safe disposal options of your Li-Ion batteries, contact your
nearest Sprint authorized service center.
Special Note: Be sure to dispose of your battery properly. In
some areas, the disposal of batteries in household or business
trash may be prohibited.
Radio Frequency (RF) Energy
Understanding How Your Phone Operates
Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When
it’s turned on, it receives and transmits radio frequency (RF)
signals. When you use your phone, the system handling your
call controls the power level. This power can range from 0.006
watt to 0.2 watt in digital mode.
Knowing Radio Frequency Safety
The design of your phone complies with updated NCRP
standards described below.
In 1991–92, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
joined in updating ANSI’s 1982 standard for safety levels with
respect to human exposure to RF signals. More than 120
scientists, engineers and physicians from universities,
government health agencies and industries developed this
SPH-D700.book Page 225 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
226 4A. Important Safety Information
updated standard after reviewing the available body of
research. In 1993, the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) adopted this updated standard in a regulation. In August
1996, the FCC adopted hybrid standard consisting of the
existing ANSI/IEEE standard and the guidelines published by
the National Council of Radiation Protection and
Measurements (NCRP).
Body-Worn Operation
To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if
you wear a handset on your body, use a Sprint-supplied or
Sprint-approved carrying case, holster or other body-worn
accessory. If you do not use a body-worn accessory, ensure
the antenna is at least 7/16 inch (1.5 centimeters) from your
body when transmitting. Use of non-Sprint-approved
accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.
For more information about RF exposure, visit the FCC website
at www.fcc.gov.
Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) for Wireless
Phones
The SAR value corresponds to the relative amount of RF
energy absorbed into the head of a user of a wireless handset.
The SAR value of a phone is the result of an extensive testing,
measuring and calculation process. It does not represent how
much RF the phone emits. All phone models are tested at their
highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when in
operation, the SAR of a phone can be substantially less than
the level reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of
factors including its proximity to a base station antenna, phone
design and other factors. What is important to remember is that
each phone meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs
do not represent a variation in safety.
All phones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates
a substantial margin of safety. As stated above, variations in
SAR values between different model phones do not mean
variations in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard
of 1.6 W/kg are considered safe for use by the public.
The highest reported SAR values of the SPH-D700 are:
Cellular CDMA mode (Part 22):
Head: 0.68 W/kg; Body-worn: 0.99 W/kg
PCS mode (Part 24):
Head: 0.44 W/kg; Body-worn: 0.77 W/kg
4G:
Body-worn: 0.53 W/kg
FCC Radio Frequency Emission
This phone meets the FCC Radio Frequency Emission
Guidelines.
FCC ID number: A3LSPHD700.
More information on the phone’s SAR can be found from the
following FCC website: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/.
SPH-D700.book Page 226 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
4A. Important Safety Information 227
Important Safety Information
FCC Notice
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
䢇Reorient the direction of the internal antenna.
䢇Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
䢇Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
䢇Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
Owner’s Record
The model, regulatory, and serial number are located on a
nameplate inside the battery compartment. Record the serial
number in the space provided below. This is helpful if you need
to contact us about your phone in the future.
Model: Epic 4G™
Serial No.:
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules.
SPH-D700.book Page 227 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
228 4A. Important Safety Information
User Guide Proprietary Notice
CDMA Technology is licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated
under one or more of the following patents:
4,901,307 5,109,390 5,267,262 5,416,797
5,506,865 5,544,196 5,657,420 5,101,501
5,267,261 5,414,796 5,504,773 5,535,239
5,600,754 5,778,338 5,228,054 5,337,338
5,710,784 5,056,109 5,568,483 5,659,569
5,490,165 5,511,073
T9 Text Input is licensed by Nuance Communications, Inc. and
is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437, U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat.
6,011,554 and other patents pending.
User Guide template version 9a_FM (April 2009)
Note: Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,688; 7,519,274
SPH-D700.book Page 228 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty 229
Warranty
⽧Manufacturer’s Warranty (page 229)
Your phone has been designed to provide you with
reliable, worry-free service. If for any reason you have a
problem with your equipment, please refer to the
manufacturer’s warranty in this section.
For information regarding the terms and conditions of
service for your phone, please visit www.sprint.com or
call Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727.
Manufacturer’s Warranty
STANDARD LIMITED WARRANTY
What is Covered and For How Long?
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC
("SAMSUNG") warrants to the original purchaser ("Purchaser")
that SAMSUNG's phones and accessories ("Products") are free
from defects in material and workmanship under normal use
and service for the period commencing upon the date of
purchase and continuing for the following specified period of
time after that date:
Phone 1 Year
Batteries 1 Year
Leather Case 90 Days
Other Phone Accessories 1 Year
What is Not Covered?
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of
Product by Purchaser. This Limited Warranty does not cover:
(a) defects or damage resulting from accident, misuse,
abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage,
exposure to moisture or dampness, neglect, unusual physical,
electrical or electromechanical stress, or defects in
appearance, cosmetic, decorative or structural items, including
framing, and any non-operative parts unless caused by
SAMSUNG; (b) defects or damage resulting from excessive
Note: In addition to the warranty provided by your phone’s
manufacturer, which is detailed on the following pages, Sprint
offers a number of optional plans to cover your equipment for
non-warranty claims. Sprint Total Equipment Protection
provides the combined coverage of the Sprint Equipment
Replacement Program and the Sprint Equipment Service
and Repair Program, both of which are available separately.
Each of these programs may be signed up for within 30 days
of activating your phone. For more details, please visit your
nearest Sprint Store or call Sprint at 1-800-584-3666.
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty
SPH-D700.book Page 229 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
230 4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty
force or use of a metallic object when pressing on a
touchscreen; (c) equipment that has the serial number or the
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged, altered
or made illegible; (d) any plastic surfaces or other externally
exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to normal
use; (e) malfunctions resulting from the use of Product in
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by
SAMSUNG; (f) defects or damage from improper testing,
operation, maintenance, installation, service, or adjustment not
furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage
from external causes such as collision with an object, or from
fire, flooding, sand, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake, or
from exposure to weather conditions, or battery leakage, theft,
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source; (h) defects
or damage caused by cellular signal reception or transmission,
or viruses or other software problems introduced into the
Product; (i) any other acts which are not the fault of SAMSUNG;
or (j) Product used or purchased outside the United States.
This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity
falls below 80% of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this
Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if (i) the battery
has been charged by a battery charger not specified or
approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery, (ii) any of the
seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering,
or (iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the
SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified.
What are SAMSUNG's Obligations?
During the applicable warranty period, SAMSUNG will repair or
replace, at SAMSUNG's sole option, without charge to
Purchaser, any defective component part of Product. To obtain
service under this Limited Warranty, Purchaser must return
Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate
container for shipping, accompanied by Purchaser's sales
receipt or comparable substitute proof of sale showing the
original date of purchase, the serial number of Product and the
sellers' name and address. To obtain assistance on where to
deliver the Product, call Samsung Customer Care at 1-888-
987-4357. Upon receipt, SAMSUNG will promptly repair or
replace the defective Product. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's
sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or
components when repairing any Product or replace Product
with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced
cases, pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of
ninety (90) days. All other repaired/replaced Product will be
warranted for a period equal to the remainder of the original
Limited Warranty on the original Product or for 90 days,
whichever is longer. All replaced parts, components, boards
and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. If
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this
Limited Warranty, Purchaser must pay all parts, shipping, and
labor charges for the repair or return of such Product.
SPH-D700.book Page 230 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty 231
Warranty
What Are The Limits On Samsung's Warranty/liability?
SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED
HEREIN, PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS," AND
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION
AND THERE ARE NO CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO:
䢇THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE;
䢇WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT;
䢇DESIGN, CONDITION, QUALITY, OR PERFORMANCE OF
THE PRODUCT;
䢇THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE
COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR
䢇COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR
CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO.
NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL
BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT.
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS THAT MAY
ARISE BY OPERATION OF LAW, INCLUDING IF APPLICABLE
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY
LIMITED TO THE SAME DURATION OF TIME AS THE EXPRESS
WRITTEN WARRANTY STATED HEREIN. SOME STATES DO
NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED
WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM
THE PURCHASE, USE, OR MISUSE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PRODUCT OR ARISING DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FROM
THE USE OR LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR FROM THE
BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SIMILAR
DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR
BENEFITS, OR FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR GROSS NEGLIGENCE) OR
FAULT COMMITTED BY SAMSUNG, ITS AGENTS OR
EMPLOYEES, OR FOR ANY BREACH OF CONTRACT OR FOR
ANY CLAIM BROUGHT AGAINST PURCHASER BY ANY
OTHER PARTY. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR
EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND
YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM
STATE TO STATE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT
EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL
PURCHASER OF THIS PRODUCT AND STATES PURCHASER'S
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY. IF ANY PORTION OF THIS LIMITED
WARRANTY IS HELD ILLEGAL OR UNENFORCEABLE BY
REASON OF ANY LAW, SUCH PARTIAL ILLEGALITY OR
UNENFORCEABILITY SHALL NOT AFFECT THE
ENFORCEABILITY FOR THE REMAINDER OF THIS LIMITED
SPH-D700.book Page 231 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
232 4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty
WARRANTY WHICH PURCHASER ACKNOWLEDGES IS AND
WILL ALWAYS BE CONSTRUED TO BE LIMITED BY ITS TERMS
OR AS LIMITED AS THE LAW PERMITS.
THE PARTIES UNDERSTAND THAT THE PURCHASER MAY
USE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IN
CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT. SAMSUNG MAKES NO
WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS AND THERE ARE NO
CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT, WHETHER SUCH
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED
WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR
OTHERWISE, INCLUDING THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY
SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT.
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE
AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE
OR EQUIPMENT LIE SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND
THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT, AS THE CASE
MAY BE.
This Limited Warranty allocates risk of Product failure between
Purchaser and SAMSUNG, and SAMSUNG's Product pricing
reflects this allocation of risk and the limitations of liability
contained in this Limited Warranty. The agents, employees,
distributors, and dealers of SAMSUNG are not authorized to
make modifications to this Limited Warranty, or make additional
warranties binding on SAMSUNG. Accordingly, additional
statements such as dealer advertising or presentation, whether
oral or written, do not constitute warranties by SAMSUNG and
should not be relied upon.
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
©2010 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All rights
reserved.
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to
change without notice. [021710]
End User License Agreement for Software
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either
an individual or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co.,
Ltd. for software owned by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and
its affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and
licensors that accompanies this EULA, which includes
computer software and may include associated media, printed
materials, "online" or electronic documentation ("Software").
BY CLICKING THE "I ACCEPT" BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS
OR OTHERWISE DISABLE THE "I ACCEPT", AND STILL
INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD, ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE
SPH-D700.book Page 232 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty 233
Warranty
THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE
TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS
IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE "DECLINE" BUTTON,
DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of
this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one
copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other
permanent storage media of one computer and use the
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,
and you may not make the Software available over a network
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same
time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine-
readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the
backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary
notices contained on the original.
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except
and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted
by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation), or modify, or
disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works
based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend,
sublicense or provide commercial hosting services with the
Software.
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and
its affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered
as part of the product support services related to the Software
provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Samsung may
use this information solely to improve its products or to provide
customized services or technologies to you and will not
disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you.
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements
and add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung
may provide to you or make available to you after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other
terms along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as
an upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software
identified by Samsung as eligible for the upgrade. After
upgrading, you may no longer use the Software that formed the
basis for your upgrade eligibility.
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer
must include all of the Software (including all component parts,
the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and
you may not retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may
not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the
SPH-D700.book Page 233 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
234 4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty
transfer, the end user receiving the Software must agree to all
the EULA terms.
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software
is subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree
to comply with all applicable international and national laws
that apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms
and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA,
you shall cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies,
full or partial, of the Software.
9. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. You expressly acknowledge
and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk and that
the entire risk as to satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy
and effort is with you. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS"
AND WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, AND SAMSUNG AND ITS LICENSORS (COLLECTIVELY
REFERRED TO AS "SAMSUNG" FOR THE PURPOSES OF
SECTIONS 9, 10 and 11) HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, OF
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF RELIABILITY OR
AVAILABILITY, OF ACCURACY, OF LACK OF VIRUSES, OF
QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE
SOFTWARE, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE
SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE
OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED
OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE
WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION
OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SAMSUNG OR A SAMSUNG
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A
WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THESE
EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
10. EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL AND
CERTAIN OTHER DAMAGES. TO THE EXTENT NOT
PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE
LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER, OR FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF DATA,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR FOR ANY PECUNIARY
DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO
YOUR USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, THE
SPH-D700.book Page 234 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty 235
Warranty
PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT OR
OTHER SERVICES, INFORMATION, SOFTWARE, AND
RELATED CONTENT THROUGH THE SOFTWARE OR
OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
OR OTHERWISE UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY
PROVISION OF THIS EULA, HOWEVER CAUSED,
REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
11. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages
that you might incur for any reason whatsoever (including,
without limitation, all damages referenced herein and all direct
or general damages in contract or anything else), the entire
liability of Samsung under any provision of this EULA and your
exclusive remedy hereunder shall be limited to the greater of
the actual damages you incur in reasonable reliance on the
Software up to the amount actually paid by you for the Software
or US$5.00. The foregoing limitations, exclusions and
disclaimers (including Sections 9, 10 and 11) shall apply to the
maximum extent permitted by applicable law, even if any
remedy fails its essential purpose.
12. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Software is licensed
only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items"
consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software
documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all
other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA
shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is
expressly excluded. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not
amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in
Seoul, Korea in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the
Korean Commercial Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration
shall be final and binding upon the parties.
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or
written communications, proposals and representations with
respect to the Software or any other subject matter covered by
this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to be void,
invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall
continue in full force and effect.
SPH-D700.book Page 235 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
236 4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the
standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a
superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve
and reuse the data by means of special software.
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File System
(EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and return all
settings to default settings. Please contact the Samsung
Customer Care Center for details.
Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC:
1301 East Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
©2010 Samsung Telecommunications America. All rights
reserved.
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to
change without notice.
Important: Please provide warranty information (proof of
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center
in order to provide this service at no charge. If the
warranty has expired on the device, charges may
apply.
Important: If you are using a handset other than a standard
numeric dialpad, dial the numbers listed in
brackets.
SPH-D700.book Page 236 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Index 237
Index
Index
Symbols
106
Numerics
3-Way Call 60, 163
4G
Overview 179
Turning Off 181
Turning On 180
Understanding the Icons 180
4G Hotspot 181
A
Activation 5
Adapter
microSD Card 125
Add 2 Sec Pause 57
Add Account 74
Add to Home screen 34
Add Wait 57
Airplane Mode 78
Activating 78
Deactivating 78
Alarm
Customizing the Onscreen
Clock 114
Delete an Existing Alarm 114
Disable an Existing Alarm
114
Hiding the Onscreen Clock
115
Alarm Clock 113
Creating a New Alarm 113
AllShare 135
Configure Settings 209
Receiving Media from Server
210
Transmitting Media 210
Amazon
Purchasing and
Downloading Music 206
Amount to Synchronize 75, 194
Android Market 196
Accessing 196
Downloads 116
Installing a Google
Application 196
Launching a Google
Application 196
My Downloads 196, 197
Reinstalling a Google
Application 197
Selecting a Google
Application 196
Android OS
Update 118
Animation 69
Answering Calls 57
Applications 30, 197
Applications Screens
Using 30
Assigning Pictures 137
SPH-D700.book Page 237 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
238 Index
Audible Touch Notifications 67
Audible selection 67
Audible touch tones 67
Haptic feedback 67
SD card notifications 67
Auto-Rotate Feature 37
Auto-sync 195
Enabling 73
B
Back Key 24
Back Up All Data 115
Backing Up Text Messages
116
Backlight 69
Keyboard 70
Battery 19–22
Capacity 19
Charging 20
Disposal 225
Extending Battery Life 21
Installing 19
Battery Use 22
Viewing 70
Bluetooth 142–147
Accessing the Paired
Device’s Settings 146
Changing Your Bluetooth
Name 144
Deleting Paired Devices 145
Disconnecting Paired
Devices 145
Making Your Device Visible
144
Pairing 144
Scanning for Bluetooth
Devices 144
Sending Items 146
Settings 143
Visible 144
Brightness 70
Browser
Adding Bookmarks to Home
Screen 177
Clear cache 174
Clear history 174
Clear Location Access 175
Clear Passwords 175
Cookies 174
Creating Bookmarks 176
Creating Bookmarks from
other Tabs 176
Creating Website Settings
175
Default zoom 173
Enable Javascript 174
Enable Plug-ins 174
Home Page 175
Landscape-Only Display 174
Navigation 173
Page Settings 173
Pop-up Windows 174
Privacy Settings 174
Remember Passwords 175
Resetting to Default 175
Security Settings 175
SPH-D700.book Page 238 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Index 239
Index
Select Text 172
Selecting Onscreen Text 173
Text Size 173
Browser Menu 171–177
C
Calculator 115
Advanced panel 115
Calendar 106–112
Adding Corporate Events
106
Adding Events 108
Event Reminders 110
Call
Add call 60
Conference 60
Merge 60
Three-way call 60
Call Forwarding 164
Call Guard 166
Call Log 87–91
Accessing From Notifications
88
Altering a Number 91
Erasing 91
Making a Call 90
Options 88
Saving a Number 90
Call Waiting 162
Caller ID 162
Spoken 122
CallerID
Tect-to-Speech 122
Calling in Lock Mode 82
Camcorder
Audio recording 140
Bluetooth 141
Delete 141
Messaging 141
Recording mode 139
Resolution 139
Settings 138, 139
Share 141
Timer 139
Video Quality 140
Video Viewer 139
YouTube 141
Camcroder
Email 141
Gmail 141
Camera 131–141
see also Pictures
Face Detection 133
Focus Area 133
Front Facing 201
Gallery 135
Image Quality 134
Image Settings 135
Resolution 134
Scene Mode 133
Settings 132, 133
Share 136
Taking Pictures 131
Timer 134
Cannot install this Hardware
127
Clear Data 85
SPH-D700.book Page 239 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
240 Index
Clear Default 85
Clear Location Access 175
Connection
Troubleshooting 127
Contact Icon 137
Contacts 92–105
Adding a Number 100
Adding an Entry 92
Adding Entries to Your
Favorites 102
Adding Your Facebook
Friends 103
Assigning a Picture 101
Assigning a Picture from
Device 101
Assigning a Picture from
online Gmail 102
Contact Menu Options 97
Deleting Entries 102
Dialing From 64
Editing 99
Editing a Number 100
Entry Options 98
Linking 104
Saving a Phone Number 94
Sending via Bluetooth 101,
146
Sending via Email 101
Sending via Gmail 101
Unlinking 105
Context Menus 39
Corporate Email 190
Account Management
Settings 75
Account Settings 193
Account Syncronization 74
ActiveSync Settings 193
Add Account 74
Adding a Sync Account 74
Back up 116
Celendar Event
Synchronization 106
Configuration 193
Configuring Settings 193
Create and Send 192
Creating a Signature 195
Creation 190
Deleting 193
Email Signature 76
Opening 191
Replying 192
Signature 195
D
Data Roam Guard 167
Data Services 168–201
see also Web
Launching the Web 169
Password 6
User Name 168
Data Synchronization
Configuring 195
Date & Time 71
Automatic 71
Device (illus.) 11
Device Lock 80
SPH-D700.book Page 240 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Index 241
Index
Device Settings 66–86
Airplane Mode 78
Display Settings 69–72
Location Settings 72
Messaging Settings 156–
162
Sound Settings 66–69
TTY Use 78
Device Updates 115, 118
Dialing Options 57
Disconnecting a Bluetooth
Device 145
Display Screen 15, 70
DiVX 112
DivX
DivX Player 204
DRM-Free 204
Protected Content 204
Registration 203
VOD Registration Number
203
Downloads 196, 197
E
Edit Sync Groups
Assigning a Picture to Device
102
Edit text menu 100
Email 182
Account Settings 189
Create and Send 188
Creation 187
Forward with files 190
Icons/Shortcuts 183
Notifications 183
Opening 188
Refresh 188
Signature 190
Email Check Frequency 75,
194
Emergency call 82
Emergency Numbers 59
Emoticons 14, 52
End-of-Call Options 61
Enhanced 911 (E911) 59
Entering Text 41–55
123ABC Mode 49
ABC Mode 44
Additional QWERTY Text
Options 51
Android Keyboard 41
Emoticons 55
Numbers 45, 49, 54
QWERTY Keyboard 51
Selecting Mode 42
Selecting Mode in Swype 48
Smileys 54, 55
Symbols 45, 49, 54
Erasing Device Content 85
Event Reminders 110
Events
Erasing a Day’s 111
Erasing All Events 112
Exchange Account 190
Exchange Mail
Back up 116
Extending Battry Life 21
SPH-D700.book Page 241 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
242 Index
F
Facebook 135, 136
Adding Your Friends to your
Contacts 103
Get Friends 103
Logging In 103
Phonebook 36
Sync Friends 103
Factory data reset 86
Favorites 64, 102
FCC Notice 227
File Viewer
Accessing 112
Flight Mode 78
Folders
Creating and Managing 36
Forgot My Unlock Pattern 82
Front Facing Camera 201
G
Gallery 71, 135
Gmail 95
Accessing Email Messages
185
Account Settings 186
Assigning a Contacts Image
102
Back up 115
Create and Send 184
Creation 183
Deleting 186
Opening 184
Refresh 184
Replying 186
Signature 185, 187
Viewing a New Email 185
Google
Account Management
Settings 74
Account Signin 55
Account Syncronization 73
Add Account 73
Adding a Sync Account 73
Creating an Account 55
Synchronizing an Account
73
Google Applications
Back up 116
Google Contact
Updating Images 102
Google Maps 211
Enabling the GPS 212
Launching 212
Searching 212
Google Search 25, 28
Google Talk 32
GPS Satellites
Usage 72
GPS Services 211
Group
Creating a New Group 96
H
Haptic Feedback 68
History 87
Home Key 24
SPH-D700.book Page 242 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Index 243
Index
Home Screen
Adding Web Bookmarks
177
Customizing 33
Extended Screens 28
Overview 26
Homepage
Creating 176
I
Image Viewer 133
In-Call Options 60
Input Method
Changing 42
International Dialing 77
International Dialing Code
Changing 77
Internet
see Web
Internet Email
Adding Additional Accounts
189
K
Key Functions 11
Keyboard Backlight 70
Keyboard Timeout 70
L
Language
Settings 72
Live Wallpapers 71
Location Mode
Activating 211
Location Settings 72
Lock Mode
Calling 82
Locking Your Device 80
Locking Your Device Screen
80
M
Making Calls 56
Market
Downloads 196, 197
Media volume 67
Memory
Clearing Application Cache
85
External SD card 83
Internal phone storage 83
Management 83
Uninstalling Third-Party
Applications 86
Menu i
Navigation 26
Menu Key 23
Add 23
Notifications 23
Search 23
Settings 23
Wallpaper 23
Menu Navigation 38
Using Your Fingers 38
Using your Keyboard 38
Message
Settings 161
SPH-D700.book Page 243 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
244 Index
Message Threads
Deleting 161
Messaging
Email 182
Multimedia Messaging 158
Notification 156
Text Messaging 156
Visual Voicemail 150
microSD 123, 124
Available space 83
Before You Begin 126
Formatting 84
Total space 83
Troubleshooting Connection
127
Umnount 84
microSD Card 123–130
Adapter 125
Formatting 129
My Files 112
Re-insertion 124
Removal 123
Write Protection 125
Missed Calls 58
MMS
Attaching Audio 159
Attaching Pictures 158
Attaching Slideshow 159
Attaching Videos 158
Capture Video 159
Record Audio 159
MMS Text Messaging 158
Multimedia Messaging 158
Composing 158
Opening 160
Replying to 160
Settings 161
Music 205–??, 206–207
Assigning a New Ringtone
207
Creating a Playlist 207
Player 206
Playlist 207
Purchasing and
Downloading from
Amazon 206
Streaming Music 208
Using a Song as a Ringtone
207
My Driver 198
My Files 112
N
NASCAR
Community 199
Exit 199
Fantasy 199
FanZone 199
Leaderboard 198
Miss Sprint 199
News & Alerts 199
Point Standings 198
Race Recap 198
Settings and Help 199
SPEED 198
Stats/Sched 198
SPH-D700.book Page 244 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Index 245
Index
Videos 199
NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile
197
Navigating the Menus 26
Navigating the Web 170
North American Dialing 77
O
Orientation 37, 69
Outlook
Account Management
Settings 75
Synchronizing 74
Outlook Email 190
Owner’s Record 227
P
Pairing Bluetooth Devices 144
Phone Book
see Contacts
Phone Number
Displaying 41
Finding 63
Saving 62, 94
Phone vibrate 68
Picasa 136
Picture ID 137
Pictures
Sending via Bluetooth 146
Taking Pictures 131
Plugins 174
Plus Code Dialing 65, 77
Primary Shortcuts 29
PRL Updates
Downloading 118
Profile Updates
Downloading 118
Q
Qik 13, 197
Enabling Front Facing
Camera 201
Recording Video 201
Quick Search 24
Using Text 25
R
Recently-Used Applications
Accessing 36
Resetting Your Device 86
Ringer volume 67
Ringers
Setting Audible Touch Tones
67
Setting for Messages 67
Setting for Notifications 67
Setting for Voice Calls 66
Silence All 68
Types 66
Vibrate 68
Roaming 164–167
Call Guard 166
Data Roam Guard 167
Roam Mode 165
Running Services
Managing 84
Stop Service 84
SPH-D700.book Page 245 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
246 Index
S
Safety Information 222–228
Saving a Phone Number 62, 94
Screen Lock 80
Screen Orientation 69
Screen Timeout 69
Search Key 24
Searching
Using Text 25
Using Voice 25
Security 80–83
Menu 80
Select Input Method vi, 42
Select Locale 72
Set Wallpaper 71
Setting the Language
English 72
Español 72
Settings 66–86
Share
AllShare 136, 141
Bluetooth 136
Email 136
Facebook 136
Gmail 136
Messaging (MMS) 136
Shortcuts
Adding via Home screen 34
Creating 33
Deleting 34
Via Applications Tab 33
Signature 76, 187, 190, 195
Silence All 68
Silent mode 69
Smiley 14
Smileys 52
SMS Text Messaging 156
Software Updates
Downloading 115
Firmware 115
Speed Dial
Assigning 64
Calling 65
Setting 57
Speed Dialing 64
Favorites 64
Sprint Football Live 197
Draft 200
Exit 200
Favorite Team 200
Help/About 200
News 200
Team Pages 200
Tweets 200
Sprint Mobile Hotspot 181, 197
Passkey 181
Sprint Navigation 213
Configuring Preferences 218
Creating a My Favorites
Location 217
Drive To 214
Getting Driving Directions
214
Launching the Product Tour
219
Maps & Traffic 214
SPH-D700.book Page 246 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Index 247
Index
Overview 213
Registering 213
Search 214
Search for Nearest Gas
Station 217
Share & More 214
Sharing a Recent Location
217
Turn by Turn Directions 216
Using 214
Using a Local Business
Category 216
Using a Physical Address
215
Sprint Service
Account Passwords 6
Activation 5
Operator Services 8
Sprint 411 7
Sprint TV 205
Sprint Zone 197
Status bar 26
Stop 84
Stop Service 84
Streaming Music 208
Suggested Word Choices 43
Swype
Configuring 46
Enabling 46
Entering Numbers 50
Entering Symbols 50
Help 47
Selecting a Text Input Mode
48
Settings 46
Text Entry Tips 47
Tips 50
Tutorial 47, 50
Synchronizing Accounts 73
System Select 166
System Update 117
System volume 67
T
Taking Pictures 131
Talk 32
Task Manager 84
Active Applications 84
Package 85
Text
Selecting on Web Page 173
Text Entry
see Entering Text 51
Text Message
Back up 116
Text Messaging 156
Settings 161
Text-to-Speech 121
Language 122
Settings 121
Third-Party Applications
Uninstalling 86
Three-Way Calling 163
TRS 79
TTY Use 78
Turning Your Device On and
Off 18
SPH-D700.book Page 247 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
248 Index
TV 205
U
Unlock Pattern 80
Changing the Pattern 82
Configuring Settings 81
Creating 80
Forgotten Your Pattern 82
Require pattern 81
Use visible pattern 81
Unlocking Your Device Screen
80
Unpairing a Bluetooth Device
145
Update Android 117
Update Firmware 115
Updating Firmware
OTA 117
Updating Your Device
Firmware 115
Updating Your PRL 118
Updating Your Profile 118
Use GPS Satellites 211
Use GPS satellites 212
Use Wireless Networks
Activating 211
User Name 168
Updating 169
V
Verbal Readout 122
Vibrate 68
Haptic Feedback 68
Vibration Intensity 68
Video
Encoding Settings 112, 202
Videos
Recording 137
Settings 140
Visible Passwords 82
Disable 83
Visual Voicemail
Changing your Main
Greeting 154
Editing the From Name 154
Enabling the Speakerphone
153
Listening to Multiple
Messages 152
Options 152
Setting Up 150
Settings 153
Voice Dialer 119
Activation 119
Calling a Contact 120
Calling a Number 120
Voice Dialing 120
Voice Input 43
Voice Search 12, 24, 25
Additional Functions 26
Voicemail
Notification 154
Retrieving 155
Setting Up 5
Volume
Media 67
Ringer 67
SPH-D700.book Page 248 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
Index 249
Index
W
Wallpaper 70, 137
Gallery 71
Home screen 137
Wallpaper Gallery 71
Warranty 229
Web 168–177
see also Data Services
Browser Menu 171–177
Email 182
Going to a Web page 171
Launching 169
Navigating 170
User Name 168
Zooming In and Out 171
Web Bookmarks 176
Wi-Fi
Connecting to a Network
178
Manually Scanning 178
Settings 178, 179
Status Indicators 179
Turning Off 178
Turning On 177
Wi-Fi Hotspot 181
Window Animation 69
Wireless Networks 72
Location 72
Write Protection 125
Y
YouTube 208
Z
Zooming 132, 138
SPH-D700.book Page 249 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM
SPH-D700.book Page 250 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Navigation menu